UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


SCHOOL  OF 
LIBRARY  SERVICE 

Presented  by 

TYRUS  HARMSEN 
OCCIDcMAL  COLLEGE 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/catalogrulesauthOOameriala 


^ 


CATALOG  RULES 

AUTHOR  AND  TITLE  ENTRIES 


COMPILED  BY  COMMITTEES  OF  THE 
AMERICAN  LIBRARY  ASSOCIATION 

AND  THE 

(BRITISH)  LIBRARY  ASSOCIATION 


AMERICAN  EDITION 


AMERICAN    LIBRARY  ASSOCIATION 

PUBLISHING    BOARD 

78  EAST  WASHINGTON  ST. 

CHICAGO,  ILL. 

1908 


'4 


\ 

\  \  SCHOOL  OF  LIBRARY  SERVICE 


CATALOG  RULES  REVISION  COMMITTEES 
AMERICAN  LIBRARY  ASSOCIATION* 

James  Christian  Meinich  Hanson,  Chief  of  Catalog  Division,  Library  of 
Congress,  Washington,  D.  C,  Chairman  and  Editor,  American  edition. 

Alice  Bertha  Kroeger,  Librarian,  Drexel  Institute  Library,  and  Director  of 
Library  School,  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  Secretary. 

Walter  Stanley  Biscoe,  Senior  Librarian,  State  Library,  Albany,  N.  Y. 

Nina  E.  Browne,  Secretary,  A.L.A.  Publishing  Board,  Boston. 

Thomas  Franklin  Currier,  Chief  of  Catalog  Department,  Harvard  College 
Library,  Cambridge,  Mass. 

Anderson  Hoyt  Hopkins,  Librarian,  Carnegie  Library,  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

Ernest  Cusihng  Richardson,  Librarian,  Princeton  University  Library,  Prince- 
ton, N.  J. 

(BRITISH)  LIBRARY  ASSOCIATIONf 

Henry  Richard  Tedder,  Librarian,  The  Athenaeum,  London,  Chairman. 
John  Minto,  Librarian,  The  Signet  Library,  Edinburgh,  Honorary  Secretary. 
Francis  Thornton  Barrett,  City  Librarian,  Glasgow. 
James  Duff  Brown,  Librarian,  Public  Libraries,  Islington,  London.  N. 
William  Elliott  Doubleday,  Librarian,  Public  Libraries,  Hampstead,  London. 

N.  W. 
George   Knottesford   Fortescue,   Keeper   of    the   Printed    Books,    British 

Museum,  London. 
Henry  Guppy,  Librarian,  The  John  Rylands  Library,  Manchester. 
Edward  Wyndham  Hulme,§  Librarian,  Patent  Office  Library,  London. 
Laurence  Inkster,  Librarian,  Public  Libraries,  Battersea,  London.    S.  W. 
Louis  Stanley  Jast,§  Librarian,  Public  Libraries,  Croydon. 
Thomas  William  Lyster,  Librarian,  National  Library  of  Ireland,  Dublin. 
George  Thomas  Shaw,  Librarian,  The  Athenaeum,  Liv^erpool. 
Charles  William  Sutton,  Librarian,  Public  Libraries,  Manchester. 

•  The  following  were  members  of  the  Committee  for  the  periods  named: 
The  Lite  Charles  Ammi  Cutter,  Librarian,  Forbes  Library,  Northampton,  Mass.,  from  1901] 

to  1903. 
Mrs.  Salome  Cutler  Fairchild.  Vice-Director,  New  York  State  Library  School,  now  Library| 
lecturer,  Albany,  N.  Y.,  from  1901  to  1905. 
t  The  following  were  members  of  the  Committee  for  the  periods  named: 
The  late  Franklin  Trengrouse  Barrett,  §  Librarian,  Public  Libraries,  Fulham,  from  1903  to| 

'905- 
The  late  John  Philip  Fldmond,  Librarian,  The  Signet  Librar>-,  Edinburgh,  from  1904  to  1905. 

§  Served  also  as  Secretary. 


f 


CoUeg» 
LikraiT 


CONTENTS 


Page 

Preface v 

Definitions xiii 

Entry  and  Heading i 

a)  Personal  authors  —  under  whom  as  author i 

b)  Personal  authors  —  under  what  part  or  form  of  name 9 

Entry  under  surname 9 

Entry  under  forename,  title,  etc 10 

Titles,  designations,  and  epithets  to  be  added  in  the  heading 11 

Pseudonyms,  change  of  name,  etc 12 

Greek,  Latin,  and  Oriental  writers 14 

Editors,  etc 16 

c)  Corporate  bodies  as  authors 17 

Government  publications 17 

Societies 21 

Institutions  (Establishments) 24 

Miscellaneous  bodies  or  organizations 30 

d)  Title  entry 33 

e)  Miscellaneous  rules 40 

Titles 43 

Imprint,  collation,  series  note 45 

Contents,  Notes,  added  entries,  analytical  entries,  references 55 

Capitals,  punctuation,  figures 57 

Appendixes 

1  Abbreviations 62 

2  Transliteration 65 

3  Sample  cards 75 


1158872 


PREFACE 

History.  The  Condensed  Rules  for  an  Author  and  Title  Catalog,  of  which  a 
revision  is  here  presented,  were  prepared  by  a  committee*  of  the  American  Li- 
brary Association  appointed  September  5,  1877.  The  full  text  of  the  rules  was 
first  submitted  at  the  Buffalo  conference  in  1883,!  was  printed  in  full  in  the  Pro- 
ceedings of  that  year  (Library  Journal,  8  :  251-254),  and  reprinted  in  Cutter's 
Rules  for  a  Dictionary  Catalog.  The  importance  of  some  uniformity  in  cata- 
loging practice  has  therefore  from  the  beginning  been  fully  recognized  by  the 
Association.  The  compilation  and  issue  of  the  A.  L.  A.  Rules  has  not,  however, 
prevented  considerable  divergence  in  the  practice  even  of  libraries  organized 
subsequent  to  1883. 

Questions  of  cooperative  cataloging  continued  to  engage  attention,  and  com- 
ing to  the  front  at  the  Montreal  meeting  of  June,  1900,  finally  resulted  in  definite 
action  by  the  Association.  One  of  the  first  matters  to  be  considered  by  the  Pub- 
lishing Board  was  the  means  of  introducing  more  uniformity  into  the  size  and 
style  of  type,  the  size  and  quality  of  catalog  cards,  and  the  rules  governing  en- 
tries. As  soon  as  the  agreement  had  been  consummated  between  the  Publishing 
Board  and  the  Library  of  Congress  whereby  the  latter  was  to  supply  printed 
cards  for  current  books,  beginning,  if  possible,  with  January  i,  1901,  the  appoint- 
ment of  the  present  Catalog  Rules  Committee  was  decided  upon. 

The  work  so  far  accomplished  by  this  committee  can  be  summarized  briefly  as 
follows:  Immediately  after  its  appointment,  about  the  middle  of  December, 
1900,  it  was  instructed  to  inquire  into  the  type  and  style  of  entry  in  use  at  the 
Library  of  Congress,  to  recommend  such  modifications  as  might  seem  necessary, 
and,  further,  to  consider  the  catalog  rules  in  force — especially  the  points  on 
which  American  libraries  had  hitherto  failed  to  reach  an  agreement. 

Special  efforts  were  to  be  made  to  secure  agreement  between  the  rules  of  the 
Library  of  Congress  and  the  new  A.  L.  A.  Rules.  In  case  of  disagreement,  the 
variations  on  the  part  of  the  Library  of  Congress  rules  were  to  be  specified  in 
notes.  In  order  that  the  issue  of  printed  cards  by  the  Library  of  Congress  might 
begin  with  the  calendar  year  1901,  the  Committee  agreed  that  for  the  time  being 
the  type  and  style  of  entry  in  use  at  the  Library-  of  Congress  should  be  accepted, 
with  a  few  slight  modifications. 

The  Committee  met  for  the  first  time  in  March,  1901.  The  points  first  to  be 
considered  were  those  affecting  typography  and  form  of  entry,  and  the  following 
recommendations  were  agreed  upon  and  submitted: 

a)  The  entire  heading  to  be  printed  in  12-point  heavy-faced  type,  exceptions 
being  made  for  titles,  explanatory  phrases,  etc. 

b)  The  author's  name  or  the  heading  to  be  printed  on  a  line  by  itself. 

c)  The  title  to  be  printed  in  1 2-point. 

*  C.  A.  Cutter,  A.  R.  Spofford.  S.  S.  Green.  J.  \.  Dyer.  1..  K.  Jones. 
t  C.  A.  Cutter,  S.  H.  Scuddcr.  C.  B.  Tillinghast,  committee. 


VI  PREFACE 

d)  The  imprint  to  be  in  roman  type. 

e)  Series  note  to  be  printed  at  the  end  of  the  collation.* 

/)  For  collation,  notes,  and  contents,  the  largest  type  that  the  32-size  card  will 
permit  is  to  be  used,  and  if  the  8-point  type  is  the  largest,  to  use  that. 

g)  The  position  of  the  collation  and  series  note  to  be  on  a  separate  line  imme- 
diately after  the  date  and  preceding  other  notes. 

h)  Notes  as  a  rule  to  be  placed  before  contents. 

It  was  decided  that  the  A.  L.  A.  Rules  printed  as  Appendix  I  to  Cutter's  Rules 
for  a  Dictionary  Catalog,  3d  edition,  1891,  should  be  made  the  basis  for  further 
consideration,  particularly  those  sections  which  had  been  included  in  "disputed 
points"  submitted  by  the  Cooperation  Committee  of  the  A.  L.  A.  at  Montreal  in 
1900. 

The  result  of  these  deliberations  was  embodied  in  the  report  to  the  Publishing 
Board  presented  at  the  annual  meeting  of  the  Association  at  Waukesha  in  July, 
1901.  The  Publishing  Board,  in  accepting  the  report,  gave  further  instructions 
to  continue  the  work  and  to  cover  the  whole  ground  of  the  catalog  rules.  It  was 
also  agreed  that  the  Library  of  Congress  might  print  the  rules  when  they  should 
be  sufficiently  advanced  to  warrant  it. 

The  great  distances  which  several  of  the  members  were  obliged  to  travel  in 
order  to  attend  the  meetings,  as  also  the  exacting  duties  of  their  positions,  neces- 
sarily tended  to  delay  the  work  of  revision.  The  demand  by  libraries  which  had 
begun  to  order  printed  cards  from  the  Library  of  Congress,  for  some  statement 
which  should  embody  the  main  points  in  the  rules  and  also  indicate  wherein  the 
Library  of  Congress  differed  from  them  in  practice,  was,  however,  increasing 
from  day  to  day,  and  the  Committee  accordingly  decided  to  issue  an  advance 
edition  immediately.  While  answering  in  a  measure  the  immediate  needs  of 
libraries  which  subscribed  to  the  printed  cards,  it  was  hoped  that  it  might  also 
serve  as  a  basis  for  the  further  consideration  of  rules  on  which  there  still  existed 
some  disagreement,  and  especially  as  a  means  of  facilitating  suggestions  and 
criticisms  on  the  part  of  librarians  who  took  an  interest  in  the  advancement  of 
cooperative  cataloging  and  who  were  desirous  of  seeing  a  standard  code  of  rules 
adopted  by  American  libraries. 

In  August,  1902,  the  Library  of  Congress  accordingly  printed  a  draft  code 
under  the  title  "A.  L.  A.  Rules — Advance  edition,"  copies  of  which  were  dis- 
tributed free  to  all  libraries  on  request. 

The  Committee  was  particularly  anxious  to  bring  about  uniformity  between 
its  reWsion  of  the  A.  L.  A.  Rules,  the  4th  edition  of  Cutter's  Rules  for  a  Diction- 
ary Catalog,  then  about  to  be  issued,  and  a  new  edition  of  the  Library  School 
Rules,  the  issue  of  which  was  also  under  consideration.  It  was  felt  that  the 
establishment  of  practical  agreement  between  these  codes  would  in  itself  repre- 
sent a  notable  advance  towards,uniformi_ty.  in  cataloging  practice. 

After  the  printing  of  the  Advance  edition,  the  Committee  continued  its  work 
of  revision.    Criticisms  and  comments  from  several  of  the  leading  librarians  and 


•  The  term  "  collation  "  is  here  used  to  cover  that  part  of  the  description  which  follows 
the  imprint  date,  viz.  volumes  or  pages,  illubtratiuns,  plates,  maps,  etc.,  and  size. 


PREFACE  Vll 

catalogers  who  had  examined  the  draft  code  were  carefully  summarized  and  sub- 
mitted for  discussion  at  three  meetings  held  during  1903  and  1904.  In  the  fall  of 
the  latter  year,  the  material  for  the  new  revision  was  sufficiently  advanced  to 
warrant  the  hope  that  a  first  edition  might  go  to  press  in  the  course  of  the 
winter. 

International  cooperation.  In  October,  1904,  the  American  Library  Associa- 
tion, then  assembled  for  its  annual  conference,  received  from  the  Library  Asso- 
ciation (formerly  the  Library  Association  of  the  United  Kingdom)  a  proposal 
looking  to  the  preparation  of  a  joint  code  of  rules.  This  invitation  was  accepted 
by  the  Executive  Board,  the  Catalog  Rules  Committee  being  authorized  to  enter 
into  communication  with  the  corresponding  committee  of  the  Library  Associa- 
tion. All  plans  for  printing  were  consequently  set  aside  pending  the  outcome  of 
the  discussions  which  followed.  There  being  no  opportunity  for  joint  meetings, 
consultation  was  carried  on  by  correspondence  only.  This,  together  with  the 
fact  that  neither  committee  was  in  a  position  to  meet  more  than  once  a  year,  has 
been  the  cause  of  some  delay  in  securing  a  full  agreement  on  the  various  points 
of  difference  found  to  exist  between  the  draft  codes  issued  by  the  two  com- 
mittees. 

Meetings  of  the  American  committee  at  Narragansett  Pier  in  June,  1906,  and 
of  the  British  committee  at  Bradford  two  months  later,  served  to  advance  the 
general  agreement  sufficiently  to  warrant  definite  preparations  for  printing.  In 
answer  to  a  communication  of  July  17,  1906,  from  the  chairman  of  the  American 
committee,  in  which  the  decisions  of  the  Narragansett  meeting  were  given  and 
plans  for  printing  presented,  Mr.  Minto,  the  Hon.  Secretary  Catalog  Rules  Re- 
vision Committee,  wrote  as  follows  (Sept.  19th,  1906): 

"My  Committee  are  of  opinion  that  the  two  draft  codes  (English  and  Ameri- 
can) have  reached  such  a  stage  of  agreement  as  to  warrant  printing  as  soon  as 
possible,  and  we  have  been  authorized  by  the  Library  Association  to  proceed 
with  and  to  conclude  such  further  negotiations  with  your  Committee  as  may  be 
necessary  for  the  issue  of  a  joint  code. 

"We  think  that  the  code  should  be  printed  in  two  editions  (English  and  Amer- 
ican) but  that  the  editions  should  as  far  as  possible  be  identical  in  arrangement 
and  wording,  and  that  where  a  divergence  of  opinion  between  the  two  Com- 
mittees exists  with  respect  to  a  particular  rule  such  difference  of  opinion  should 
be  explained  either  in  a  note  appended  to  the  rule  in  question  or  by  the  printing 
of  the  two  rules  side  by  side,  showing  which  is  which.  I  trust,  however,  that 
we  shall  be  able  to  arrive  at  practical  unanimity  on  most  points  so  that  the 
cases  where  divergence  of  opinion  exists  may  be  very  few  indeed." 

Following  the  receipt  of  this  letter,  the  American  committee  proceeded  to  pre- 
pare its  rules  for  final  presentation  to  the  Association  and  at  the  annual  meeting 
in  May,  1907,  two  copies  of  the  code,  as  revised  to  date,  were  submitted  as 
exhibits  accompanying  the  annual  report  of  the  Committee.  The  report,  em- 
bodying a  recommendation  that  the  rules  be  printed,  was  referred  to  the  Council 
of  the  Association,  which  on  May  28th  voted  as  follows: 

"That  the  Council  adopt  the  code  of  rules  as  submitted,  and  that  the  Catalog 


Vlll  PREFACE 

Rules  Committee  be  authorized  to  proceed  with  such  further  negotiations  as 
may  be  necessary  in  order  to  harmonize  any  differences  as  to  details  still  existing 
between  the  British  and  American  committees,  and  to  definitely  formulate  the 
rules  in  final  form.  Voted  further,  That  the  printing  and  publication  of  the  rules 
be  referred  to  the  incoming  Executive  Board." 

On  September  26th,  the  new  Executive  Board  voted: 

"That  the  printing  of  the  Catalog  rules  be  entrusted  to  the  Publishing  Board 
in  accordance  with  their  letters  of  May  25,  1907,  and  September  10, 1907,  and  in 
conformity  with  the  requirements  of  the  Committee  on  catalog  rules." 

The  Chairman  of  the  American  committee  had,  in  the  meantime,  attended  the 
annual  conference  of  the  Library  Association  at  Glasgow,  Scotland,  Sept.  16-19, 
and  in  a  session  with  the  Catalog  Rules  Revision  Committee  of  that  association 
an  agreement  was  reached  on  all  the  rules  with  the  exception  of  a  few  which 
deal  with  authors  and  publications  that  change  their  names  or  titles.  It  was 
decided  that  wherever  a  divergence  of  opinion  existed  with  respect  to  a  particu- 
lar rule,  both  the  American  and  English  editions  should  embody  an  explanation 
of  the  same,  either  in  the  form  of  a  note  appended  to  the  rule,  or  by  printing  the 
two  rules  side  by  side.    Final  preparations  for  printing  followed  these  decisions. 

Rules.  The  informal  instructions  issued  to  the  Committee  by  the  Chairman 
of  the  Publishing  Board  in  1901  called  for  a  code  of  rules  which  should  be  in 
accord  with  the  system  governing  the  compilation  of  catalog  entries  at  the  Li- 
brary of  Congress.  As  a  result,  the  question  of  how  far  the  needs  of  smaller 
libraries  of  a  popular  character  should  also  be  considered  came  up  for  immediate 
consideration.  The  committee  found  that  under  the  circumstances  its  decisions 
must  be  guided  chiefly  by  the  requirements  of  larger  libraries  of  a  scholarly  char- 
acter; that  only  incidentally  would  it  be  possible  to  outline  modifications  or 
variations  of  practice  suitable  for  the  smaller  libraries.  Later  it  was  decided 
that  a  simplified  edition,*  specially  adapted  to  the  needs  of  smaller  libraries  of  a 
popular  character,  would  prove  more  effective  than  occasional  directions  and 
variations  inserted  in  the  main  code. 

In  spite  of  this  determination  to  omit  suggestions  intended  for  the  guidance  of 
popular  libraries,  it  will  be  found  that  the  Committee  has  permitted  itself  to 
present  occasional  alternatives  and  exceptions,  believing  that  in  certain  cases 
discretion  should  be  left  to  the  individual  library. 

As  an  illustration  of  an  alternative  or  exception,  rule  72  may  be  quoted.  This 
is  a  general  rule  which  calls  for  entry  of  a  society  under  the  first  word  of  its  name 
not  an  article.  It  has  seemed  proper  that  a  few  exceptions  should  here  be  pro- 
vided; likewise  that  alternatives  should  be  outlined  for  the  use  of  libraries  which 
for  definite  classes  of  societies  may  prefer  entry  under  the  name  of  a  place  or 
country.  Again,  when  an  institution  is  closely  associated  with  a  certain  locality 
by  its  buildings,  or  for  other  reasons,  and  when  its  name  is  not  sufficiently  dis- 
tinctive to  be  easily  remembered,  entry  under  the  place  has  been  prescribed 
(rule  82).  There  is  accordingly  an  attempt  to  distinguish  between  societies  and 
associations  on  the  one  hand  and  institutions  as  limited  to  permanent  establish- 

*  In  preparation  under  the  direction  of  Alice  B.  Kroeger  and  Theresa  Hitchler. 


PREFACE  IX 

ments  with  buildings  and  equipment  on  the  other.  The  latter  class  also  affords 
exceptions  and  variations  which  it  may  be  well  to  note  here.  In  the  first  place, 
institutions  whose  names  begin  with  a  proper  name,  e.g.  the  many  universities, 
etc.,  which  bear  the  names  of  founders  or  other  individuals,  would  almost  in- 
variably be  thought  of  under  this  name  rather  than  that  of  the  place  where 
located.  Secondly,  entry  under  a  general  institution  for  one  which  constitutes 
merely  a  branch  or  department  of  it  is  in  many  cases  much  to  be  preferred  to 
independent  entry  under  the  name  or  place  of  location  of  the  subordinate  insti- 
tution. These  considerations  have  caused  a  series  of  exceptions  to  be  introduced 
after  the  general  rule  for  institutions  (cf.  83-99). 

While  open  to  the  charge  of  inconsistency,  it  is  the  opinion  of  the  Committee 
that  the  rules  for  societies  and  institutions,  as  they  now  stand,  will  serve  to 
bring  the  vast  majority  of  these  bodies  under  the  heading  where  they  are  most 
hkely  to  be  looked  for  in  English  and  American  libraries. 

The  Committee  realizes  that  these  attempts  to  provide  for  exceptions  and 
alternatives,  as  also  the  occasional  use  of  the  word  "may  "  where  a  more  peremp- 
tory form  of  statement  might  be  preferred  by  many,  will  afford  opportunities  for 
criticism.  In  view  of  this  fact  it  is  appropriate  to  repeat  here  a  quotation  from 
Cutter's  Rules  for  a  Dictionary  Catalog,  which  at  the  author's  own  suggestion 
was  included  in  the  introduction  to  the  Advance  edition  of  these  rules  in  1902: 

"The  convenience  of  the  public  is  always  to  be  set  before  the  ease  of  the  cata- 
loger.  In  most  cases  they  coincide.  A  plain  rule  without  exceptions  is  not  only 
easy  for  us  to  carry  out,  but  easy  for  the  public  to  understand  and  work  by. 
But  strict  consistency  in  a  rule  and  uniformity  in  its  application  sometimes  lead 
to  practices  which  clash  with  the  public's  habitual  way  of  looking  at  things. 
When  these  habits  are  general  and  deeply  rooted  it  is  unwise  for  the  cataloger  to 
ignore  them,  even  if  they  demand  a  sacrifice  of  system  and  simplicity.  That 
[the  Committee  has]  always  understood  the  public's  views,  estimated  correctly 
its  power  of  changing  them,  and  drawn  the  line  in  the  right  place  between  a 
conservative  regard  for  custom  and  a  wish  to  lead  the  public  towards  a  desirable 
simplicity  and  consistency  is  too  much  to  assume;  but  [we]  have  at  least  always 
looked  for  the  reasons  on  both  sides." 

Mr.  Cutter  was,  until  his  last  illness,  one  of  the  most  active  members  of  this 
committee.  His  close  connection  with  the  work  of  the  revision  at  a  time  when 
the  4th  edition  of  his  own  rules  was  in  course  of  preparation  had  no  doubt  much 
to  do  with  bringing  about  a  close  agreement  between  the  latter  and  the  new 
A.  L.  A.  Rules. 

Largely  on  account  of  this  cordial  cooperation  of  the  author,  it  is  possible  in 
the  present  code  to  refer  freely  to  "  Cutter '"  whenever  his  rules  contain  a  particu- 
larly full  statement,  or  for  other  reasons  ought  to  be  consulted  by  the  cataloger. 

In  addition  to  "Cutter's  Rules"  and  the  Library  of  Congress  supplementary 
rules,*  other  codes  are  occasionally  referred  to,  more  especially  the  Eclectic 


*  A  few  of  the  Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rules  have  been  adopted  with  but  slight 
modifications;  others  are  printed  as  notes,  this  expedient  being  considered  preferable  to  a 
reference  because  of  the  large  number  of  libraries  which  are  now  using  the  Librar>'  of  Con- 
gress printed  cards. 


X  PREFACE 

Card  Catalog  Rules  of  Linderfelt  and  the  Rules  of  the  Prussian  university  and 
government  libraries,  both  of  which  are  largely  based  on  Dziatzko's  "Instruc- 
tion "  of  1886. 

It  is  only  natural  that  the  Committee  should  have  watched  with  great  interest 
the  efforts  made  in  Germany  towards  a  coordination  of  cataloging  practice  in 
Prussian  university  and  government  libraries.  It  was  felt  that  the  Prussian 
"  Gesamtkatalog "  might,  in  course  of  time,  lead  to  cooperative  efforts  which 
would  have  an  important  bearing  on  similar  undertakings  outside  of  Germany. 

The  "Instruktionen  fiir  die  alphabetischen  Kataloge  der  Preussischen  Biblio- 
theken  und  fiir  den  Preussischen  Gesamtkatalog,"  published  in  1899,  with  its 
"  Erlauterungen,  Nachtrage,  Beispielzusatze,"  of  1905,  has  therefore  been 
freely  consulted.  While  there  is  little  likelihood  of  agreement  on  the  two  funda- 
mental points  of  difference  between  German  and  Anglo-American  rules,  viz. 
entry  of  anonymous  books  and  corporate  entry,  and  while  the  Committee  has 
not  had  any  correspondence  or  direct  relations  with  representatives  of  the 
German  movement,  we  have  felt  that  it  was  our  duty,  nevertheless,  in  this  new 
revision  of  the  A.  L.  A.  Rules,  to  take  due  cognizance  of  the  instructions  promul- 
gated by  the  Ministry  of  Public  Worship  of  Prussia  with  reference  to  the 
"Gesamtkatalog,"  and  in  formulating  our  own  decisions  to  bear  in  mind  the 
possibility  of  future  international  agreement  and  cooperation. 

Scope  of  the  Rules.  Author  and  title  entries  only  are  considered.  No  direc- 
tions will  therefore  be  found  for  added  entries  or  references  under  subject  or 
form  headings.* 

Ezamples.f  The  examples  and  illustrations  in  the  first  edition  are  in  some 
instances  the  result  of  a  hurried  selection.  It  is  hoped  that  librarians  will  advise 
the  Committee  in  regard  to  examples  which  may  be  incorporated  in  a  subse- 
quent edition.  It  is  felt  that  this  important  feature  of  the  code,  as  well  as  the 
elaboration  or  modification  of  the  rules  themselves,  should  be  made  a  subject 
for  cooperative  effort. 

Abbreyiations,  Capitals.  No  abbreviations  which  should  require  any  expla- 
nation have  been  used  in  the  body  of  the  rules.  In  Appendix  i  an  attempt  has 
been  made  to  supply  a  list  of  the  abbreviations  which  are  most  likely  to  be  need- 
ed in  the  ordinary  library  catalog.    General  directions  for  their  use  are  added. 

In  view  of  the  considerable  diversity  found  to  exist  in  methods  of  capitaliza- 
tion, not  only  in  different  countries,  but  among  different  writers  of  the  same 
country,  the  Committee  has  felt  that  for  the  present  only  general  directions 
should  be  given,  each  library  to  decide  for  itself  how  far  these  directions  are  to 
be  followed. 

There  has  been  added,  however,  for  the  use  of  those  who  may  desire  more 

•  A  new  edition  of  the  List  of  Subject  Headings  now  in  preparation  will  to  some  extent  deal 
with  these  questions. 

t  The  examples  included  are  of  three  kinds,  viz.  l)  author  and  title  examples,  imprint  and 
collation  as  a  rule  being  omitted;  2)  examples  consisting  of  headings  only;  3)  sample  cards 
(Appendix  5).  In  printing,  hanging  indention  has  been  used  to  differentiate  title  entries 
such  as  periodicals,  directories,  year*books.  etc.,  from  entries  with  author  headings  and 
anonymous  title  entries. 


PREFACE 


XI 


explicit  instructions,  a  revision  of  the  Library  of  Congress  capitalization  rules 
contained  in  the  A.  L.  A.  Rules,  Advance  edition  of  1902,  p.  16-17,  which  aim  to 
give  some  idea  of  the  practice  followed  by  the  Library  of  Congress  on  its  printed 
cards.  It  should  be  emphasized  that  they  are  intended  primarily  for  the  card 
catalog. 

Acknowledgments.  First  of  all,  we  wish  to  express  our  most  cordial  appre- 
ciation of  the  kindly  and  generous  way  in  which  the  British  committee  has  in- 
variably met  our  suggestions.  The  spirit  in  which  it  has  received  our  proposab 
is  in  a  large  measure  responsible  for  the  success  which  has  attended  the  nego- 
tiations. 

Furthermore,  the  Committee  would  acknowledge  its  indebtedness  to  the  Prus- 
sian *'  Instruktionen  "  for  many  valuable  suggestions,  particularly  in  the  sections 
which  deal  with  personal  authors. 

We  desire  also  to  express  our  thanks  to  a  large  number  of  associates  in  the 
A.  L.  A.  who  have  at  various  times,  by  kindly  criticism  and  suggestions,  assisted 
in  the  advancement  of  the  revision.  The  following  have  been  particularly 
active:  C.  W.  Andrews  and  A.  G.  S.  Josephson,  John  Crerar  Library;  Adelaide 
R.  Hasse,  Public  Library,  New  York;  G.  M.  Jones,  Public  Library,  Salem, 
Mass.;  W.  C.  Lane,  Harvard  University  Library;  Margaret  Mann,  Carnegie 
Library,  Pittsburgh,  Pa.;  Charles  Martel,  Steingrimur  Stefansson,  and  W.  F. 
Koenig,  Library  of  Congress;  Dr.  B.  C.  Steiner,  Enoch  Pratt  Free  Library;  M. 
L.  Sutliflf,  California  State  Library;  Dr.  G.  E.  Wire,  Worcester  Co.  Law  Library, 
Worcester,  Mass. 

In  addition  to  the  loss  of  Mr.  Cutter,  referred  to  above,  the  Committee  in  1905 
suffered  through  the  resignation,  on  account  of  illness,  of  one  of  its  most  valued 
members,  Mrs.  S.  C.  Fairchild,  who  had  served  on  the  Committee  since  its 
organization  in  1901.  Her  associates  are  anxious  to  testify  to  the  valuable 
assistance  rendered  by  her  at  all  times  and  regret  that  she  was  unable  to  share 
in  their  concluding  labors. 

In  the  preparation  of  rules  for  Oriental  writers,  the  Committee  has  had  the 
assistance  of  Dr.  Gottheil,  of  Columbia  University,  Dr.  Hyvernat,  of  the  Catho- 
lic University  of  America,  Professors  Lanman  and  Toy,  of  Harvard  University, 
and  Dr.  Littmann,  now  of  the  University  of  Strassburg. 

To  the  assistants  in  the  Catalog  Division,  Library  of  Congress,  who  have 
assisted  the  Chairman  in  his  work  of  editing  the  Rules,  much  credit  is  due.  In 
proofreading,  preparation  of  copy,  and  selection  of  examples,  they  have  rendered 
valuable  assistance.  That  it  was  possible  to  submit  to  the  Annual  Conference  of 
1907  printed  proofs  of  the  Rules  as  revised  to  date,  was  due  largely  to  their 
cooperation  and  to  that  of  the  foreman  of  the  Branch  Printing  Office  at  the 
Library,  Mr.  W.  H.  Fisher,  and  the  head  of  the  Proofreading  section  of  the 
Catalog  Division,  Miss  E.  A.  Runner. 

The  Chairman  is  particularly  indebted  to  Miss  Mary  M.  Melcher  and  Miss 
Julia  Gregory,  also  of  the  Catalog  Division,  for  assistance  in  reading  the  proofs 
of  the  final  edition,  and  for  the  preparation  of  the  index. 


DEFINITIONS   OF  TERMS  AS  USED   IN  THE  RULES* 

Added  entry.  A  secondary  entry,  i.e.  any  other  than  the  main  entry,  (cf. 
Main  entry)  There  may  be  added  entries  for  editor,  translator,  title,  subjects, 
etc. 

Where  printed  cards  are  used  an  added  entry  is  a  duplicate  of  the  main  entry,  with 
the  addition  of  a  special  heading.  In  a  written  card  catalog  added  entries  are  generally 
given  in  an  abbreviated  form,  the  title  being  abridged  and  the  imprint  and  collation  omitted 
wholly  or  in  part. 

Alternative  title.     A  subtitle  introduced  by  "or"  or  its  equivalent;  e.  g. 

Hypatia;  or.  New  foes  with  an  old  face. 

Analytical  entry.  The  entry  of  some  part  of  a  book  or  of  some  article  con- 
tained in  a  collection  (volume  of  essays,  serial,  etc.)  including  a  reference  to  the 
publication  which  contains  the  article  or  work  entered.  (For  form  of  entry  see 
p.  79-80,  Sample  cards) 

Anonymous.  A  book  is  considered  anonymous  if  the  author's  name  does  not 
appear  in  the  book  itself. 

Author.    I  The  writer  of  a  book,  as  distinguished  from  translator,  editor,  etc. 

2  In  a  broader  sense,  the  maker  of  the  book  or  the  person  or  body  immediately 
responsible  for  its  existence.  Thus,  a  person  who  collects  and  puts  together  the 
writings  of  several  authors  (compiler  or  editor)  may  be  said  to  be  the  author  of  a 
collection.  Corporate  bodies  may  be  considered  the  authors  of  publications 
issued  in  their  name  or  by  their  authority. 

Author  entry.  An  entry  of  a  work  in  a  catalog  under  its  author's  name  as 
heading,  whether  this  be  a  main  or  an  added  heading.  The  author  heading  may 
consist  of  a  personal  or  a  corporate  name  or  some  substitute  for  it,  e.  g.  initials, 
pseudonym,  etc. 

Bastard  title.    See  Half-title. 

Binder's  title.  The  title  lettered  on  the  back  of  a  book  by  the  binder,  as 
distinguished  from  the  title  on  the  publisher's  original  binding  or  cover,  (cf. 
Cover-title) 

Caption.    The  heading  at  the  beginning  of  the  text  or  of  a  chapter,  section,  etc. 

Caption  title.    The  title  taken  from  the  caption. 

Catalog  (of  books)  A  list  of  books,  usually  arranged  according  to  some 
definite  plan.  As  distinguished  from  a  bibliography,  it  is  a  list  of  books  in  some 
library  or  collection.  (For  definitions  of  various  kinds  of  book  catalogs  see  Cut- 
ter's Rules) 

Collation.  That  part  of  the  description  which  specifies  the  volumes,  pages, 
illustrations,  plates,  maps,  etc.,  constituting  the  book. 

Collection.  A  number  of  works  or  parts  of  works,  considered  as  constituting 
a  whole,  e.g.  a  collection  of  monographs,  a  collection  of  essays,  etc. 

Colophon.  A  statement  at  the  end  of  a  book  giving  the  title,  writer's,  and 
printer's  or  publisher's  name,  and  date  and  place  of  printing.  Frequently  one  or 
more  of  these  items  is  omitted;  again  there  may  be  in  addition  the  printer  s  or 
publisher's  device. 

*  The  definitions  here  given  occasionally  differ  somewhat  from  those  found  for  the  same 
terms  in  dictionaries  and  similar  reference  books. 


Xiv  DEFINITIONS 

Compiler.  One  who  produces  a  work  by  collecting  and  putting  together 
written  or  printed  matter  from  various  sources. 

Compound  name.  A  name  formed  from  two  or  more  proper  names,  often  con- 
nected by  a  hyphen,  a  conjunction,  or  a  preposition. 

Continuation,    i  A  work  published  as  a  supplement  to  one  previously  issued. 
2  A  part  issued  in  continuance  of  a  serial  or  a  book. 

Corporate  entry.  Entry  under  the  names  of  bodies  or  organizations  for  works 
published  in  their  name  or  by  their  authority. 

Cover-title.  The  title  printed  on  the  original  covers  of  a  book  or  lettered  on 
the  publisher's  binding,  as  distinguished  from  the  title  lettered  on  the  back  of  a 
particular  copy  of  the  book  by  the  binder,     (c/.  Binder's  title) 

Date.    I  Imprint  date.    The  year  of  publication  as  specified  on  the  title-page. 

2  Copyright  date.  The  date  of  copyright  as  given  in  the  book,  as  a  rule  on 
the  back  of  the  title-page. 

3  Preface  date.    The  date  given  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  the  preface. 

4  Colophon  date.    The  date  given  in  the  colophon. 

Dissertation,  Academic.  An  essay  or  treatise  presented  by  a  candidate  in 
partial  fulfillment  of  the  requirements  for  a  degree,    (c/.  Program  dissertations) 

Edition.  The  whole  number  of  copies  printed  from  the  same  set  of  types  and 
issued  at  the  same  time. 

Editor.  One  who  prepares  for  publication  a  work  or  collection  of  works  not 
his  own.  The  editorial  labor  may  be  limited  to  the  preparation  of  the  matter 
for  the  printer,  or  it  may  include  supervision  of  the  printing,  revision  (restitu- 
tion) or  elucidation  of  the  text,  and  the  addition  of  introductions,  notes  and 
other  critical  matter. 

Entry.  The  record  of  a  book  in  a  catalog  or  list.  See  also  Main  entry,  Added 
entry.  Title  entry.  Analytical  entry.  Series  entry. 

Entry  word.  The  word  by  which  the  entry  is  arranged  in  the  catalog.  The 
first  word  of  the  heading,    (cf.  Heading) 

Folio.  I  Size:  according  to  the  American  Library  Association  scale,  a  book 
above  30  cm.  in  height. 

2  Format :  a  book  printed  on  sheets  folded  once,  making  two  leaves,  or  four 
pages. 

3  The  separate  leaves  of  a  book,  as  folio  i,  folio  2,  etc.,  whether  numbered  or 
unnumbered;  or  the  whole  number,  as  10,  50,  100  folios,  etc. 

Frontispiece.    A  plate  or  other  illustration  facing  (or  preceding)  the  title-page. 
Sometimes  used  to  designate  an  engraved  title-page. 

Half-title.  A  brief  title,  usually  without  author's  name  or  imprint,  printed  on 
a  leaf  preceding  the  main  title-page;  called  aLso  bastard  title. 

Head-line.  The  line  at  the  top  of  the  page  giving  the  title  of  the  book  or  the 
subject  of  the  chapter  or  of  the  page.     (cf.  Running  title.  Caption) 

Heading.  The  word  (or  words)  by  which  the  alphabetic  place  of  an  entry  in 
the  catalog  is  determined,  generally  the  name  of  the  author,  the  subject,  or  the 
first  word,  not  an  article,  of  the  title,     (f/.  Entry  word) 


DEFINITIONS  XV 

Illustrations.  Pictorial  and  other  representations  (plates,  photographs,  por- 
traits, maps,  plans,  facsimiles,  tables,  diagrams)  placed  in  a  book  or  other  publi- 
cation, usually  to  elucidate  the  text. 

In  a  narrow  sense  the  term  stands  for  illustrations  in  the  text.     See  also  Plate. 

Imprint.    The  place,  publisher's  name,  and  date,  ordinarily  printed  at  the 

foot  of  the  title-page. 

Joint  author.  A  person  who  writes  a  book  in  collaboration  with  one  or  more 
associates,  the  portion  written  by  each  not  usually  being  specified. 

Main  entry.    The  full  or  principal  entry,  as  a  rule  the  author  entry,     {cf. 

Added  entry) 

In  a  card  catalog  the  main  entry  card  contains  (generally  on  the  back)  a  record  of  all 
the  other  entries  made  for  the  work  in  question. 

Periodical.  A  publication  intended  to  appear  in  successive  numbers  or  parts 
at  more  or  less  regular  intervals  and,  as  a  rule,  for  an  indefinite  time.  Each  part 
properly  contains  matter  on  a  variety  of  topics,  generally  by  several  contrib- 
utors. 

Newspapers,  and  the  Memoirs,  Proceedings,  Journals,  etc.  of  societies  are  not  consid- 
ered regular  periodicals  under  the  rules. 

Plate.  A  full  page  illustration  usually  printed  on  special  (heavy)  paper,  one 
side  of  the  leaf  being  blank.     Plates  are  not  as  a  rule  included  in  the  paging. 

Plates  are  occasionally  found  with  a  legend  or  brief  description  printed  on  the  verso  or 
with  engravings  on  both  sides. 

Printer.  The  person  who  prints  a  book,  as  distinguished  from  the  publisher 
and  bookseller  who  issue  and  sell  it. 

The  same  person  or  firm  may,  however,  be  printer,  publisher,  and  bookseller,  or  printer 
and  publisher,  or  publisher  and  bookseller. 

Privately  printed.  Books  are  said  to  be  privately  printed  when  they  are 
issued  from  a  private  press,  or  for  private  distribution  only,  and  are  not  (ordi- 
narily) in  the  trade. 

Program  dissertations.  Dissertations  accompanying  the  "programs"  {i.  e. 
announcements  of  memorial  exercises,  lectures,  etc.)  published  by  universities 
and  schools,  especially  those  of  Germany,  Austria,  Switzerland,  and  the  Scandi- 
navian countries. 

Pseudonym.    An  assumed  name  under  which  a  person  writes. 

FHiblisher.    See  Printer. 

Reference.    A  direction  from  one  heading  to  another,  e.  g.    Alighieri,  Dante 

see  Dante  Alighieri. 

Reprint,  i  A  reproduction  of  an  earlier  edition  of  a  work,  without  alteration. 
A  new  title-page  may  be  added  or  substituted,  or  the  original  title-page  may  be 
used,  with  or  without  the  addition  or  substitution  of  the  date  of  the  reprint. 
Reproductions  in  facsimile,  whether  printed  from  type  or  otherwise,  are  called 
facsimile  reprints. 

2  A  "  separate,"  i.  e.  an  article  from  a  serial  publication  or  a  collection,  sep>- 
arately  issued,  whether  printed  from  the  forms  or  plates  of  the  original  or  from 
type  actually  reset. 


Xvi  DEFINITIONS 

Running  title.  The  title  repeated  at  the  top  of  each  page  of  the  book  or  of 
a  section. 

Separate.     See  Reprint,  2. 

Serial.  A  publication  issued  in  successive  parts,  usually  at  regular  intervals, 
and,  as  a  rule,  intended  to  be  continued  indefinitely.  Serials  include  periodicals, 
annurls  (reports,  year-books,  etc.)  and  memoirs,  proceedings,  and  transactions 
of  societies. 

Serial  number.  The  number  denoting  the  place  of  the  publication  in  a  series, 
as.  Third  annual  report. 

Series,  i  A  number  of  volumes,  usually  related  to  one  another  in  subject  or 
otherwise,  issued  successively  by  a  publisher,  as  a  rule  in  uniform  style,  with  a 
collective  title  which  generally  appears  at  the  head  of  the  title-page,  on  the  half- 
title,  or  on  the  cover. 

2  Each  of  two  or  more  volumes  of  essays,  lectures,  articles,  or  other  writings, 
similar  in  character  and  issued  in  sequence,  e.  g.  Lowell's  Among  my  books, 
second  series. 

3  Several  successive  volumes  of  a  periodical  or  other  serial  publication  num- 
bered separately  in  order  to  distinguish  them  from  preceding  or  following  vol- 
umes of  the  same  publication,  e.  g.  Notes  and  queries,  ist  series,  2d  series,  etc. 

Series  entry.  A  brief  entry  of  the  several  works  in  the  library  which  belong 
to  a  series  under  the  name  of  that  series  as  heading. 

Series  note.  A  note  stating  the  name  of  a  series  to  which  a  book  belongs. 
The  series  note  ordinarily  follows  the  collation. 

Sobriquet.    A  fanciful  or  humorous  appellation ;  a  nickname. 

Subtitle.    A  secondary  or  subordinate  title,  usually  explanatory. 

Thesis.     See  Dissertation,  Academic. 

Title.  I  In  the  broad  sense,  the  distinguishing  name  of  any  written  produc- 
tion as  given  on  the  title-page,  including  the  name  of  the  author,  editor,  trans- 
lator, the  edition,  etc.,  but  excluding  the  imprint. 

2  In  the  narrow  sense  the  title  does  not  include  the  name  of  the  author, 
editor,  etc. 

See  also  .Alternative  title.  Binder's  title.  Caption  title,  Cover-title,  Half-title, 
Running  title,  Subtitle. 

Title  entry.  The  record  of  a  book  in  the  catalog  under  some  word  of  the 
title,  generally  the  first  word  not  an  article.  A  title  entry  may  be  a  main  entry 
or  an  added  entry. 

Title-page.  The  page  at  the  beginning  of  a  book  on  which  is  printed  the  title 
and  imprint,    (cf.  Half-title) 

Transliteration.  \  representation  of  the  characters  of  one  alphabet  by  those 
of  another. 

Volume.    I  A  book  distinguished  from  other  books  or  from  other  parts  of  the 
same  work  by  having  its  own  title-page  and  usually  independent  paging. 
2  Whatever  is  contained  in  one  binding. 


ENTRY  AND  HEADING 

a)  PERSONAL  AUTHORS  —  UNDER  WHOM  AS  AUTHOR 

1  Author  entry.  Enter  a  work  under  the  name  of  its  author  whether  indi- 
vidual or  corporate,    (c/.  Definitions:  Author) 

Lecky,  William  Edward  Hartpole.  The  American  revolution,  1763-1783;  be- 
ing the  chapters  and  passages  relating  to  America  from  the  author's  History  of 
England  in  the  eighteenth  century,  by  William  Edward  Hartpole  Lecky  ... 
Arranged  and  edited,  with  historical  and  bibliographical  notes,  by  James  Albert 
Woodburn  ... 

Added  entry:  Woodburn,  James  Albert,  ed. 

Linnaean  society  of  New  York.  Abstract  of  the  proceedings  of  the  Linnaean 
society  of  New  York. 

2  Joint  author  entry.  Enter  a  work  written  jointly  by  two  authors  (including 
correspondence)  under  the  name  of  the  one  first  mentioned  on  the  title-page, 
followed  by  the  name  of  the  second,  in  the  form,  Besant,  Sir  Walter,  and  Rice, 
James.*  When  there  are  more  than  two  authors  use  the  form  Doe,  John,  and 
others;  give  the  names  of  the  others  in  the  title  if  there  are  no  more  than  three, 
or  if  more  than  three,  in  a  note  or  in  the  contents.  Make  added  entries  or  refer- 
ences for  the  second  and  following  authors.    (Cutter,  3,  4,  218) 

Stevenson,  Robert  Louis,  and  Osboume,  Lloyd.     ...  The  ebb-tide,  a  trio 
and  quartette     ...     by  Robert  Louis  Stevenson  and  Lloyd  Osboume. 
Added  entry:     Osboiu-ne^Lloyd, joj«i  author. 
Cheston,  Henry  Clifford,  and  others.     Physics,  theoretical  and  descriptive,  by 
Henry  C.  Cheston  ...  J.  Stewart  Gibson  ...  and  Charles  E.  Timmerman  ... 
Added  entries:     i.     Gibson,  J.  Stewart,  joint  author.     2.  Timmerman, 
Charles  E.,  joint  author. 

3  Dissertations.  Enter  dissertations  published  before  1800  under  the 
praeses  as  praeses.  Make  an  added  entry  under  the  respondent  when  he  is 
known  to  be  the  author.  The  word  praeses  or  respondent  is  to  be  added  in  the 
heading.  Treat  in  the  same  way  the  later  dissertations  of  certain  universities 
at  which  the  old  custom  continued  after  1800  (e.  g.  the  Swedish  and  Finnish,  and 
of  the  German  particularly  Tubingen) 

Mosheim,  Johaim  Lorenz,  1694?-! 755,  praeses.  Historia  Michaelis  Serveti ... 
[17281 

Diss. —  HelmsttH:it  (Hcinrich  von  .Allwoerden,  respondent  and  author) 
Added  entry:     Allwoerden,  Heinrich  von,  b.  1703,  respondent. 
Schuebler,  Gustav,  1 787- 1 834,  praeses.     Untersuchungcn  iiber  die  tempcratur- 
verandcrungcn  der  vegetabilien  und  verschiedene  daniit  in  beziehung  stehende 
gegenstande  ...     1829. 

Diss. —  Tubingen  (W.  Neuffer,  respondent) 

Enter  dissertations  published  after  1800  under  the  author,  excepting  those  of 
universities  in  which  the  old  custom  was  kept  up  after  1800  {e.  g.  the  Swedish 
and  Finnish,  and  of  the  German  particularly  Tubingen) 

*  On  the  Library  of  Congress  printed  cards  the  name  of  the  first  author  only  is  given  in 
the  heading. 


a  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

If  two  respondents  are  named  without  a  praeses,  and  without  designating  the 
author,  enter  under  the  first  and  make  added  entry  under  the  second. 

(Cutter,  6.  Eclectic,  169-174.  Wheatley's  How  to  catalogue  a  library,  p. 
105-121) 

Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  13 

The  title-pages  of  dissertations  generally  embody  a  more  or  less  uniform  statement  in 
regard  to  the  faculty  or  institution  before  which  the  thesis  is  presented,  and  of  the  degree 
for  which  its  author  is  a  candidate.  It  is  unnecessary  to  repeat  this  statement  in  full  in 
every  title.  The  essential  parts  can  best  be  given  in  a  note.  If  the  author  has  added  a 
sketch  of  his  life,  this  is  also  to  be  mentioned  in  a  note.     (See  examples) 

The  title  is  to  be  given  in  the  briefest  form,  omitting  author's  name,  etc.  ...  If  the 
dissertation  is  a  text  edited  by  a  candidate  for  a  degree  and  is  entered  under  the  author  or 
title  of  that  text,  the  name  of  the  editor  (author  of  the  dissertation)  is  not  to  be  omitted  . . . 

Examples  illustrating  form  of  entry  and  of  the  note  of  thesis,  dissertation,  etc. : 

1  Earlier  dissertations. 

Schurtzfleisch,  Conrad  Samuel,  i65|.i-i7o8,  praeses.     ...  Lemmata  antiqvi- 
tatum  francicariim  ...     Lipsiae,  apud  N.  Scipionem,  1698. 
Diss. —  Wittenberg  (P.  C.  Scheibler,  respondent) 

Reinharth,  Tobias  Jacob,  1684-1743,  praeses.  ...  De  rcrvm  vxoriarvm  marito 
traditar\m  favore,  ct  qvibvsdam  cavtionibvs  earvm  cavsa  attendendis  ...  Er- 
fordise,  typis  J.  C.  Heringii  1 1 7321 

Diss. —  Erfurt  (G.  L.  Hoyer,  respondent  and  author)* 

Added  entry:    Hoyer,  Georg  Leopold,  respondent. 

2  Modern  dissertations. 

a)  American  dissertations. 

Stockard,  Sallie  Walker.  The  history  of  Alamance  ...  Raleigh,  N.  C, 
Capital  printing  company,  1900. 

Thesis  (m.  a.)  —  University  of  North  Carolina. 

Philoxenus,  bp.  of  Hierapolis.  Three  letters  of  Philoxenus,  bishop  of  Mab- 
b6gh  (485-519)  ...  ed.  from  Syriac  manuscripts  ...  by  Arthur  Adolphe  Vaschalde 
...  Roma,  Tip.  della  R.  Accademia  dei  Lincei,  1902. 

Thesis  (ph.  d.)  —  Catholic  university  of  America,  Washington,  D.  C. 

Biography. 

Added  cntrj-:    Vaschalde,  Arthur  Adolphe,  1871-         ed. 

b)  French  and  Belgian  dissertations. 

Mascart,  Jean  Marcel,  1872-  ...  Contribution  k  I'etude  dcs  planetes  tele- 

scopiques  ...     Paris,  (iauthier-V'illars  et  fils,  1897. 
These  —  Univ.  de  Paris. 

Haure,  Marcel  i.e.  Jean  Marie  Theodore  Marcel,  1859-  ...  Rccherches 

sur  les  ptjints  de  Weierstrass  d'une  courbc  plane  algebrique  ...     Paris,  Gauthier- 
Villars  et  fils,  1896. 

These  —  Faculte  des  sciences  de  Paris. 

Fontaine,  Theodore,  1858-  De  la  sensation  et  de  la  pensec  ...     Louvain, 

C.  Peeters.  1858. 

These  —  Univ.  de  Louvain. 

Note.  If  there  are  two  universities  in  a  city  they  are  to  be  distinguished  by  their  respec- 
tive names  {e.g..  These  —  Univ.  de  Paris.  These  —  Institut  cathoiique,  Paris)  For 
French  theses  from  1808  to  July  10,  1896,  note  should  read:  These  —  Faculte  do  droit  de 
Paris;  These  —  Faculte  des  lettres  de  Nancy,  etc.    Consult  Minerva  and  Catalogue  des  theses. 

•  The  authorship  of  the  respondent  is  in  many  cases  difficult  to  establish.  His  designation 
on  the  title-piige  as  "  auctor  '  is  not  to  be  accepted  implicitly  as  proof  of  authorship  in  the 
strict  sense  of  the  word;  and  the  phrase  "  and  author  "  must  therefore  be  queried  in  doubtful 
cases,  cf.  E.  Horn,  Die  disputationen  u.  promotionen  a.  d.  deutschen  universitSten,  Central- 
blatt  f.  oibliothekswesen,  XI.  beiblatt  (1893)  and  (i.  Kaufmann,  Zur  geschichte  der  acade- 
mischen  grade  und  disputationen,  Centralblatt  f.  bibl.,  xi.  bd.  (1894)  P-  201-225. 


PERSONAL    authors:     UNDER    WHOM    AS    AUTHOR  3 

c)  German  dissertations. 

Lange,  Albert  Theodor,  h.  1818.     De  motu  respiratorio  ...     Berolini,  typis 

Nietackianis  118421 

Inaug.-diss.  —  Berlin. 
Vita. 

Apocalypsis  Anastasiae.    Apocalypsis  Anastasiae;  edidit  Rudolf  us  Homburg 
...     Lipsiae,  typis  B.  G.  Teubneri,  1903. 
Inaug.-diss.  —  Leipzig. 
Vita. 
Added  entry:    Homburg,  Rudolf,  1865-         ed. 

d)  Dutch  dissertations. 

Westrate,  Hendrik  Abraham.  Gelderland  in  den  patriottentijd  ...  Am- 
hcm,  P.  Gouda  Quint,  1903. 

Proefschrift  —  Utrecht. 

e)  Swedish  dissertations. 

Sandegren,  Magnus  i.e.  Sven  Axel  Magnus,  1859-  Till  historien  om  stats- 
hvalfningen  i  Sverige  1809  ...  Goteborg,  Goteborgs  handelstidnings  aktiebolags 
tryckeri,  1890. 

Akademisk  afhandling  —  Upsala. 

f)  Treat  like  ordinary  books  the  dissertations  of  other  countries  (Norwegian,  Danish, 

etc.)  the  title-pages  of  which  do  not  contain  a  generally  uniform  statement  of 
thesis  or  degree.  Whenever  this  statement  appears  on  the  title-page  and  the 
connection  permits  its  separation  from  the  title,  it  is  to  be  given  in  a  note,  to 
consist  preferably  of  the  word  thesis  followed  by  the  name  of  the  university, 
e.g. 

Thesis  —  Copenhagen. 

For  form  of  imprint  see  p.  48  (Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  12,  §10) 

Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  25 

Dissertations  accompanying  the  "programs"  {i.  e.  announcements  of  memorial  exercises, 
lectures,  etc.)  published  by  universities  and  schools,  especially  those  of  Germany,  Austria, 
Switzerland,  and  the  Scandinavian  countries,  are  to  be  cataloged  in  accordance  with  the 
following  rules: 

1  Enter  under  author  of  the  dissertation.  Give  title,  place  and  date,  and  paging  of  the 
dissertation,  disregarding  the  title  of  the  program  proper  and  omitting  the  publisher  or 
printer.  State  in  a  note  the  occasion  of  the  publication  (for  form  see  examples  below) 
Separate  issues  of  the  dissertation  without  the  program  are  to  be  so  designated  (example  7) 

2  Anonymous  dissertations  without  title  {e.  g.  those  issued  with  the  Indices  lectionum) 
are  to  be  entered  under  made-up  titles. 

3  If  a  program  is  accompanied  by  two  or  more  dissertations,  enter  each  independently, 
with  the  note:  Programm  —  etc.,  as  provided  for  under  i.  No  reference  to  the  other 
dissertations  need  be  made. 

4  Make  added  entry  (examples  1-2,  5-6)  ox  form  entry  (examples  3-4)  for  t-he  institution. 

When  the  programs  are  classified  as  such,  and  an  entry  made  for  the  series  under  the  name 
of  the  institution,  the  added  entry  is  of  course  omitted  (example  8) 

1  iVahlen,  Johannes]  1830-  (De  attractione  pronominumi     Berolini  [1873] 

Programm  —  Univ.  Berlin  (Index  lect.  Sem.  aest.) 

Added  entry:     Berlin.     Universitat.     Index  lectionum  1873. 

2  [Schneider,  Carl  Ernst  Christophi  1 786-1856.     (De  utilitate  et  praestantia  lit- 
terarum  graecarum  ct  latinarum)     Vratislavnac,  1828. 

Programm  —  Univ.  Breslau  (Index  lect.  Sem.  hib.) 

Added  entry:     Breslau.  Universitat.     Index  lectionum  1828-29. 

3  Rydberg,  Johannes  Robert,  1854-         Fysikens  utveckling  till  allman  tillst&nds 
lara  ...     Lund,  1903. 

Programm  —  Univ.  Lund  (with  list  of  doctors'  degrees) 
Added  entry:     Lund.     Unlversitet — Doctors' degrees,  1903. 

4  Nitzsch,  Christian  Ludwig,  1 782-1 837.     ...  Pterylographiae  avium  pars  prior. 
Halae,  1833. 

Programm  —  Univ.  Halle  (with  award  of  prizes) 
Added  entry:     Halle.     Universitfit  —  Prizes,  1833. 


4  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

5  Elter,  Anton,  1858-        ...  De  Henrico  Glareano  geographo  et  antiquissima 
forma  'Amcricae' commentatio.     Bonnae  1 18961 

Programm  —  Univ.  Bonn  (Natalicia  Gvilelmi  ll) 
Added  entry:     Bonn.     UniversitHt. 

6  Jeitteles,  Liudwigi  Hieinrichi  1830-1883.     Ueber  einige  seltene  und  wenig 
bekannte  saugethiere  dcs  sudostlichen  Deutschlands  ...     |St.  Polten,  18671 

Programm  —  N.-O.  I^ndes-ober-realschule,  St.  Polten. 
Added  entry:     Sankt  PSlten,  Austria.     Landes-real-  und  ober-gym- 
nasium. 

7  Rautenberg,  Erast  iTheodori     ...  Sprachgcschichtliche  nachweisc  zur  kunde 
des  germanischen  alterthumes  ...     Hamburg,  1880. 

Scfxirate,  from  Programm  —  Gelehrtenschule  des  Johanneums,  Hamburg. 

8  Hamburg.     Stadtbibliothek.     ...    Autotypcn   der   reformationszeit   auf   der 
Hamburger  stadtbibliothek,  von  A.  v.  Dommer  ...     Hamburg,  1881. 

Programm  —  Akademisches  und  real-gymnasium,  Hamburg. 
Added  entry:     Dommer,  Arrey  von,  1828-1905,  ed. 
The  added  entr>'  "Hamburg.     Akademisches  und  real-gymnasium"  is 
omittetl  here,  there  being  a  series  entry: 

Hamburg.     Akademi.sches  und  real-gymnasium.     Programm. 

4  Illustrators.  Enter  books  consisting  solely  of  illustrations,  or  illustrated 
works  of  which  the  illustrations  are  the  chief  feature,  under  the  illustrator  or 
designer.    In  the  latter  case  make  added  entry  under  the  author  of  the  te.xt. 

If  the  illustrations  are  secondary  in  importance  to  the  te.xt,  the  book  is  to  be 
entered  under  the  name  of  the  author,  with  added  entry  under  the  name  of  the 
illustrator. 

In  doubtful  cases  enter  under  the  author  of  the  text  with  added  entry  under 
the  illustrator. 

(Cutter,  8.     Eclectic,  96-99) 

Finden,  William,  and  Finden,  Edward  F.  Views  of  ports  and  harbours, 
watering  places,  fishing  villages,  and  other  picturesque  objects  on  the  English 
coast.  Engraved  by  William  and  Edward  F"inden,  from  paintings  by  J.  D. 
Harding,  G.  Balmer,  E.  VV.  Cooke,  T.  Creswick,  and  other  eminent  artists. 

Text  by  W.  A.  Chatto. 

Added  entries:     i.  Finden,  Edward  Francis.  2.  Chatto,  William  Andrew. 

Omond,  George  William  Thomson.     Bruges  and  West  Flanders,  painted  by 
Amedee  Forestier;  described  by  (i.  W.  T.  Omond. 
Added  entr>-:     Forestier,  AmedSe,  illus. 

Jimgman,  Mrs.  Beatrix.  Holland,  by  Nico  Jungman;  text  by  Beatrix  Jung- 
man. 

Added  entry:     Jungman,  Nico,  illus. 

5  Engravers.  Enter  engravings  under  the  engraver,  unless  they  are  repro- 
ductions of  the  work  of  another  artist,  in  which  case  the  entry  is  to  be  made 
under  the  original  artist,  with  added  entry  for  the  engraver.  A  collection  by  one 
engraver,  copied  from  the  works  of  several  artists,  is  to  be  entered  under  the 
engraver.     (Cutter,  9.    Eclectic,  100) 

Turner,  Joseph  Mallord  William.  Picturesque  views  on  the  southern  coast 
of  England,  from  drawings  made  principally  by  J.  M.  W.  Turner,  R.  a.,  and 
engraved  by  W.  B.  Cooke,  Ge<jrge  Cooke,  and  other  eminent  engravers. 

Added  entries:  i.  Cooke,  William  Bernard,  engr.  2.  Cooke,  George, 
engr. 

Toschi,  Paolo.  Toschi's  engravings  from  frescos  by  Correggio  and  Par- 
megiano.  Reproducefl  by  the  heliotype  process  from  the  Gray  collection  of  en- 
gravings, Harvard  university. 

Added  entries:  i .  Correggio  i.e.  Antonio  Allegri,  known  as.  2.  Mazzuoli, 
Francesco,  called  il  Parmigianino.  3.  Harvard  university.  William  Hayes 
Fogg  art  museum.     Gray  collection  of  engravings. 


PERSONAL    authors:     UNDER    WHOM    AS    AUTHOR  $ 

6  Cartographers  (Map  makers)    Enter  maps  under  the  cartographer.    If  the 

name  of  the  cartographer  is  not  found,  enter  under  the  pubHsher.    (Cutter,  9, 

368.    Eclectic,  100.    British  museum  Rules,  1900,  Catalogue  of  maps) 

Gregory,  C.  C.  McMillan's  map  of  New  Brunswick.  Drawn  by  C.  C, 
Gregory.     Scale  of  statute  miles  [ca.  8  to  the  inch) 

Johnston,  W.  and  A.  K.,  pub.  Johnston's  commercial  and  library  chart  of 
the  world  on  Mercator's  projection. 

7  Architects.     Enter  designs  and  plans  of  buildings  under  the  architect. 

(Cutter,  9.     Eclectic,  100) 

Holman,  Emily  Elizabeth.  Picturesque  summer  cottages,  containing  35 
new  and  original  designs  for  summer  cottages,  including  also,  some  summer 
hotels,  country  clubs  and  road  houses,  ranging  in  price  from  8250  to  $3,000. 
Designed  and  pub.  by  E.  E.  Holman,  architect  ... 

8  Music.  Enter  a  musical  work  under  the  composer,  with  added  entry  under 
editor  or  arranger,  and  also  under  the  author  of  the  words  in  case  of  operas, 
oratorios,  cantatas,  etc.  (Cutter,  11,  367.  Eclectic,  102-104.  British  museum 
Rules,  1900,  Catalogue  of  music) 

Albert,  Eugen  d'.     Der  improvisator.     Oper  in  drci  aufziigcn.     Dichtung  von 

Gustav  Kastropp,  musik  von  Eugen  d'Albcrt  ... 
Added  entry:     Kastropp,  Gustav,  librettist. 

Enter  variations  under  the  composer  of  the  variations,  with  added  entry  under  the  com- 
poser of  the  original  theme  or  themes. 

Heller,  Stephen.     Variations  sur  un  theme  de  Beethoven  (Andante  dc  la 
Sonate  Op.  57)  pour  piano  par  Stephen  Heller.     Op.  133. 
Added  entry:     Beethoven,  Ludwig  van. 

9  Librettos.    Enter  a  libretto  under  the  librettist  if  known,  otherwise  under 

the  title.    In  either  case  niake  added  entry  under  the  composer. 

Barbier,  Jules.  Faust,  a  lyric  drama  in  five  acts;  book  by  J.  Barbier  and  M. 
Carre,  music  by  Charles  Gounod. 

On  cover:     Libretto,  English  and  French  text. 

Added  entries:     i.  Carre,  Michel,  joint  author.     2.  Gounod,  Charles 
Franfois.     Faust. 

ID  Thematic  catalogs.*    Enter  thematic  catalogs  under  the  composer,  with 

added  entry  for  the  editor  or  compiler. 

Mozart,   Johann  Chrysostom  Wolfgang  Amadeus.     Chronologisch-thcma- 
tisches  vcrzeichniss  sammtlicher  tonwerke  Wolfgang  Amade  Mozart's  ...     Von 
dr.  Ludwig  ritter  von  Kochel. 

Added  entry:    Kochel,  Ludwig  Alois  Friedrich,  ritter  von. 

II  Heraldic  visitations.f  Enter  heraldic  visitations  under  the  name  of  the 
herald  or  king-of-arms  who  makes  the  visitation,  with  added  entries — 

1  For  other  heralds  assisting  in  or  continuing  the  visitation. 

2  For  the  editor. 

3  For  the  college  or  king-of-arms. 

Bysshe,  Sir  Edward.  A  visitation  of  the  county  of  Esse.x.  Begun  .\.  D. 
MDCL.xiiii.,  finished  A.  D.  mdcl.wih.  by  Sir  Edward  Bysshe,  knt.,  Clarenceu.\ 
king  of  arms.     Ed.  by  J.  J.  Howard  ... 

Added  entries:     i.  Howard,  Joseph  Jackson,  cd.     2.  England.     College 
of  arms. 

*  Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  24.  t  Librarj-  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  9- 


6  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

12  Bulls.    Enter  papal  bulls  as  follows: 

1  A  general  collection,  under  the  heading  Roman  Catholic  church,  with  sub- 
heading Pope.  Make  added  entry  under  the  collector  or  compiler  and  also  under 
the  title  by  which  the  collection  is  known. 

Roman  Catholic  church.  Pope.  Bullarium  romanum  novissimum  ...  tcrtio 
nunc  editum  a  D.  \.  M.  Chcriihino. 

.Added  cntr>':     Cherubinus,  Laertius. 

2  -\  collection  of  bulls  limited  to  a  single  pontificate,  or  a  single  bull,  under  the 
same  heading  as  a  general  collection,  with  the  addition  of  the  inclusive  dates  of 
the  pontificate  and  the  name  of  the  pope.  Make  a  reference  from  the  name  of 
the  pope,  c.  g.  Alexander  vi,  pope,  143 1 -1503,  see  also  Roman  Catholic  church. 
Pope,  I4Q2-JJ0J  (Alexander  vi) 

In  the  case  of  a  single  bull,  the  addition  of  the  first  word  or  words  to  the  heading  is 
recommended,  especially  in  dealing  with  a  large  number  of  titles. 

Roman  Catholic  church.     Pope,  1492-1503  {Alexander   VI) 

Roman  Catholic  church.     Pope,  1 700-1 721  {Clemens  XI)   Unigenilus. 

13  Commentaries.    When  the  text  of  a  work  is  given  with  a  commentary,  the 

work  is  to  be  cataloged  under  the  name  of  the  author  of  the  te.xt  and  a  reference 

or  an  added  entry  made  under  the  name  of  the  author  of  the  commentary. 

It  may  occasionally  be  preferable  to  enter  commentaries  published  with  the  text  under 
the  commentator.  Examples  are:  (a)  when  the  typographical  disposition  of  the  text 
clearly  indicates  its  intended  secondary  position,  e.  g.  in  small  typ>e  at  the  foot  of  the  page 
in  parenthesis,  etc.,  to  elucidate  the  commentary;  (b)  when  the  text  is  prinied  in  frag- 
mentary form  or  is  distributed  through  the  commentary  in  such  a  way  that  it  cannot  be 
readily  distinguished  from  it. 

(Cutter,  14-15.     Eclectic,  139-140) 

Demosthenes.  Demosthenes,  with  an  F)nglish  commentary  by  the  Rev. 
Robert  Whiston  ... 

Added  entry:     Whiston,  Robert,  ed. 

Gill,  William  Hugh.     The  incarnate  Word ;  being  the  Fourth  gospel  elucidated 
by  intcr|X)lation  for  popular  use,  by  William  Hugh  Gill  ... 
Added  entry:     Bible.      N.  T.  John. 

14  Continuations  (Supplements)  Enter  a  continuation  which  is  in  the  form 
of  an  independent  work  with  separate  title,  whether  printed  with  the  original 
or  not,  under  the  name  of  its  own  author,  with  a  reference  from  the  author  of 
the  original  work.    (Cutter,  16.    Eclectic,  166) 

Justi,  Karl  Wilhelm.  Grundlage  zu  einer  hessischen  gelehrten-  schriftsteller- 
und  kiinstler-geschichte  vom  jahre  1806  bis  zum  jahre  1830.  Fortsetzung  von 
Strieder's  Hessischer  gelehrten-  und  schriftsteller-geschichte  und  nachtrage  zu 
diesem  wcrke.     Von  d''  Karl  Wilhelm  Justi. 

Strieder,  Friedrich  Wilhelm.  Grundlage  zu  einer  hessischen  gelehrten-  und 
schriftsteller-geschichte. 

For  a  continuation  of  this  work  see  Justi,  Karl  Wilhelm.    Grundlage  zu 
einer  hessischen  gelehrten-  schriftsteller-  und  kiinstler-geschichte. 

Copinger,  Walter  Arthur.  Supplement  to  Main's  Repertorium  bibliogra- 
phicum  ...     By  W.  .\.  Copinger  ... 

Reichling,  Dietrich.  Appendices  ad  Hainii-Copingeri  Repertorivm  bibliogra- 
phicvm;  additioncs  et  emendationcs  cdidit  Dietericus  Reichling  ... 

Hain,  Ludwig  Friedrich  Theodor.     Repertorium  bibliographicum 

see  also 
Copinger,  Walter  Arthur.     Supplement  to  Hain's  Repertorium  bibliogra- 

phicum. 
Reichling,  Dietrich.     Appendices  ad  Hainii-Copingeri  Repertorivm  biblio- 

graphicvm. 


PERSONAL    authors:     UNDER    WHOM    AS    AUTHOR  7 

15  Indexes.    Enter  an  index  with  the  work  to  which  it  belongs.    Make  added 

entry  under  the  compiler. 

The  New  York  genealogical  and  biographical  record.  Devoted  to  the  interests 
of  American  genealogy  and  biography  ...     v.  i-     ;  Jan.  1870- 

Subject-index.     Volumes  i-x.\iv.     Comp.  by  The<Klore  M.  Banta. 

Added  entry:     Banta,  Theodore  Melvin,  comp. 

Klein,  Julius  Leopold,     (icschichte  dcs  drama's,  von  J.  L.  Klein. 

Register-band  zur  Geschichte  des  drama's  von  J.  L.  Klein.     Bd.  i-,\iii. 

Bearb.  von  Theodor  Ebncr. 

Added  entry:    Ebner,  Theodor,  comp. 

An  index  to  the  various  publications  of  a  society  or  an  institution  is  to  be 

entered  under  the  name  of  the  body,  with  added  entry  under  the  compiler. 

Archaeological  institute  of  America.  ...  Index  to  publications.  1879-1889. 
By  William  Stetson  Merrill. 

Added  entry:     Merrill,  William  Stetson,  comp. 

A  general  index  is,  as  a  rule,  to  be  entered  under  its  compiler,  but  many  in- 
dexes to  periodical  and  miscellaneous  literature,  especially  such  as  are  published 
periodically,  are  better  known  under  their  titles,  and  should  be  so  entered. 

Griswold,  William  McCrillis.  ...  An  index  to  articles  relating  to  history, 
biografy,  literature,  society  and  travel,  contained  in  collections  of  essays  (etc.) 
By  W:  M.  Griswold  ... 

Poole's  index  to  periodical  literature,  by  William  Frederick  Poole  ...  with  the 
assistance  as  associate  editor  of  William  I.  P"letcher  ...  and  the  cooperation  of 
the  American  library  association  a:  d  the  Library  association  of  the  United 
Kingdom...     Rev.  ed.     v.  i  ...    1802-1881. 

The  later  volumes  are  designated  "first  supplement,"  "second  supple- 
ment," etc. 

Added  entries:     I.   Poole,  William  Frederick.     2.   Fletcher,   William 
Isaac. 

The  Annual  library  index,   1905-  Including  periodicals,  American  and 

English;  essays,  book-chapters,  etc.;  bibliographies,  necrology,  and  index  to 
dates  of  principal  events.  Fd.  with  the  cooperation  of  members  of  the  Ameri- 
can library  association  by  W.  I.  Fletcher  and  H.  K.  Haines. 

Added  entries:     i.  Fletcher,  William  Isaac.     2.  Haines,  Helen  Elizabeth. 

...  A.  L.  A.  portrait  index.  Index  to  portraits  contained  in  printed  books  and 
periodicals,  comp.  with  the  cooperation  of  many  librarians  and  others  for  the 
Publishing  board  of  the  American  library  association.  Ed.  by  William  Cool- 
idge  Lane  ...  and  Nina  E.  Browne  ... 

Added  entries:     i.  Lane,  William  Coolidge.     2.  Browne,  Nina  Eliza. 

16  Concordances.    Enter  a  concordance  under  its  compiler  with  added  entry 

under  the  author  concordanced.    (Cutter,  20.    Eclectic,  134, 138) 

Fumess,  Helen  Kate  (Rogers)  ''Mrs.  H.  H.  Fumess."  A  concordance  to 
Shakespeare's  poems:  an  index  to  every  word  therein  contained,  by  Mrs. 
Horace  Howard  Furncss  ... 

Added  entry:     Shakespeare,  William  —  Concordances. 

(British)  Library  association  rule:  Enter  a  concordance  under  the  author  con- 
cordanced with  added  entry  under  the  compiler. 

17  Epitomes.    Enter  an  epitome  under  the  original  author,  with  added  entry 

under  the  epitomizer.     (Cutter,  17.    Eclectic,  141) 

Malory,  Sir  Thomas.  The  boy's  King  .Arthur;  iKMng  Sir  Thomas  Malor>"s 
history  of  King  Arthur  and  his  knights  of  the  Round  tatl* ;  ed.  for  boys  with  an 
introduction  by  Sidney  Lanier  ... 

Added  entry-:     Lanier,  Sidney,  ed. 


8  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

i8  Excerpts,  chrestomathies.    Enter  excerpts  (selections)  and  chrestomathies 
from  a  single  author  under  that  author,  with  added  entry  or  reference  under  the 
compiler.     (Cutter,  19) 
For  entry  of  excerpts,  etc.,  from  several  authors  see  126. 

Bums,  Robert.     Gems  from  Burns;  selections  from  the  poems,  letters,  lyrics 
and  iKillatls  of  Robert  Burns,  by  Gordon  Garrett  ... 
Added  entry:     Garrett,  Gordon,  ed. 
Plato.     Chrestomathia  Platoniana. 

With  the  Latin  translation  of  Jean  de  Serres.     Ed.  by  F.  ('.  Mueller. 
Added  entries:  i.  Serres,  Jean  de,  tr.  2.  Mueller,  Ferdinand  Christian,  ed. 

19  Revisions.  Enter  a  revision  under  the  name  of  the  original  author  unless 
it  has  become  substantially  a  new  work,  in  which  case  it  is  to  be  entered  under 
the  reviser,  with  a  reference  or  an  added  entry  under  the  original  author. 
(Cutter,  18.     Eclectic,  289-293) 

Johnston,  Alexander,  1849- 1889.  A  history  of  the  United  States  for  schools 
...  by  Alexander  Johnston  ...  4th  ed.,  rev.  and  continued  by  Winthrop  More 
Daniels  ...  and  William  MacDonald  ...     1902. 

Added  entries:     i.  Daniels,  Winthrop  More.     2.  MacDonald,  William. 
Seubert,  Adolf  Friedrich.     Allgemeines  kiinstlcr-lexicon;  odcr.  Lebcn  und 
werke  dcr  beriihmtesten  bildenden  kiinstler.     2.  aufl.  umgearb.  und  crganzt  von 
A.  Seubert. 

2d  edition  of  Friedrich  Miiller's  Die  kiinstler  aller  zeiten  und  volkpr. 
Miiller,  Friedrich.     Die  kiinstler  aller  zeiten  und  volker. 

For  a  second  edition  of  this  work  see  Seubert,  Adolf  Friedrich.     Allge- 
meines kiinstler-lexicon.     1882. 

20  Table-talk,  interviews.    Enter  table-talk  under  the  name  of  the  talker, 

interviews  under  the  name  of  the  person  interviewed.    (Cutter,  22) 

Selden,  John.  The  table  talk  of  John  Selden;  ed.  with  an  introduction  and 
notes  by  Samuel  Harvey  Reynolds  ... 

Added  entry:    Reynolds,  Samuel  Harvey,  ed. 

21  Translations.    Enter  a  translation  under  the  heading  of  the  original  work. 

Make  added  entry  under  the  translator.    (Cutter,  245-247) 

Homerus.  The  Iliad  of  Homer,  done  into  English  prose  by  Andrew  I^ng  ... 
Walter  Leaf  ...  and  Ernest  Myers  ... 

Addetl  entries:     i.  Lang,  Andrew,  tr.     2.  Leaf,  Walter,  tr.     3.   Myers, 
Ernest,  tr. 

22  Manuscripts.  Manuscripts,  in  so  far  as  they  require  entry  in  the  general 
author  catalog,  are  to  be  treated  according  to  the  following  rules: 

1  Enter  manuscripts  and  facsimiles  of  manuscripts  of  an  author  under  his 

name. 

Keats,  John.     Hyperion.     {Manuscript)     Hyperion;  a  facsimile  of  Keats's 
autograph  manuscript  with  a  transliteration  of  the  manuscript  of  The  fall  of 
Hyperion,  a  dream.     With  introductions  and  notes  by  Ernest  de  Selincourt. 
Added  entry:     Selincourt,  Ernest  de,  ed. 

2  Enter  an  anonymous  manuscript  or  the  facsimile  of  an  anonymous  manu- 
script under  the  name  or  the  title  by  which  it  is  generally  known,  provided  this 
is  distinctive;  otherwise  under  the  designation  or  number  in  the  collection  to 
which  it  belongs. 

Codex  Fejerv4ry-Mayer. 

C6dice  Martinez  Gracida. 

Flateyjarb6k. 

Nibelungenlied.     Mss.,  h. 

Paris.    Bibliothique  nationale.     Mss.  lat.  103 18. 

Collections  of  manuscripts  or  of  facsimiles  of  manuscripts  are  to  be  treated  like  other 
collections  {see  126) 
(Cutter,  109,  366) 


PERSONAL    authors:     UNDER    WHAT    PART    OR    FORM    OF    NAME  9 

b)   PERSONAL  AUTHORS  —  UNDER   WHAT  PART  OR  FORM   OF  NAME 

23  Full  name  in  vernacular  form.    In  the  heading  give  names  of  authors  in 

full  and  in  their  vernacular  form,  with  certain  specified  exceptions  {see  rules 

27-28,  31-32,  38-39,  42-50,  52,  56)    Refer  from  the  form  not  adopted. 

For  a  list  of  authorities  on  fuU  names  see  "A  selection  of  cataloguers'  reference  books 
in  New  York  state  library." 

ENTRY   UNDER   SURNAME 

24  General  rule.  In  general,  enter  persons  of  modem  times  under  the 
family  name  followed  by  the  forenames.  Variations  from  this  practice  are  noted 
in  succeeding  rules. 

25  Compound  surnames.    Enter  compound  surnames  under  the  first  part 

of  the  name  and  refer  from  the  other  parts. 

Campbell-Bannerman,  Sir  Henry. 
Watts-Dunton,  Theodore. 
Hart-Synnot,  Arthur  FitzRoy. 
Pardo  Bazan,  Emilia. 
Cotarelo  y  Mori,  Emilio. 
Calder6n  de  la  Barca,  Pedro. 
Schulze-Delitzsch,  Hermann. 
Imbert  de  Saint-AJnand,  Arthur  Leon,  baron. 
Leveson-Gower,  Arthur  Francis  Gresham. 
Simonde  de  Sismondi,  Jean  Charles  Leonard. 
Vivien  de  Saint-Martin,  Louis. 
Pflugk-Harttung,  Julius  Albert  G.  von. 

When  it  is  found  that  the  author's  own  usage  or  the  custom  of  his  country  distinctly 
favors  entry  under  some  part  of  the  name  other  than  the  first,  it  may  be  advisable  to 
make  an  exception  to  this  rule. 

Salomons,  Sir  David  Lionel  Goldsmid-Stem-,  bart. 
Fenelon,  Frangois  de  Salignac  de  La-Mothe. 

26  Surnames  with  prefixes.  Enter  surnames  with  prefixes  under  the  part 
following  the  prefix,  except  (a)  in  English ;  (b)  in  French  when  the  prefix  consists 
of  or  contains  an  article;  (c)  in  Italian  and  Spanish  when  the  prefix  consists 
simply  of  an  article;  (d)  when  the  prefix  and  the  name  are  written  as  one  word. 
Naturalized  names  with  prefixes  are  to  be  treated  according  to  the  rules  for  the 
language  adopted.  (Cutter,  29.  Eclectic,  2-1 1,  427.  British  museum  Rules, 
12) 

Hoffman  ( von),  Lima  ( de),  Ponte  e  Horto  ( da),  Santos  Pereira 

Jardin  ( dos).  Brink  ( ten),  Haar  ( ter),  Haeghen  ( van  der), 

Lacr  ( van) 

English:  A'  Bccket,  Ap  John,  Dc  Quincey,  De  La  Rue,  De  Morgan,  D'Isracli,  Le 

Galienne,  MacDonald,  Van  Buren. 
French:  Du  Monccl,  La  Rochefoucauld,  Le  Sage,  Du  Piu,  Du  Bocage;  but  Rosny 

( de),  Bouille  ( dc),  Allard  {- —  de) 

Italian  and  Spanish:  La  Lumia,  La  Farina,  Lo  Gatto;  but  Farina  ( da),  Rio 

( del),  Torre  ( deiia) 

Prefix  compounded  with  the  name:  V'anderkinderc,  Vonhausen,  Zurlauben,   De- 

chambrc,  X'anderhoeck,  Delacroix,  Lafuente,  Laserna,  Dallolio. 

27  Form  of  forenames.  Give  forenames  in  the  form  most  common  in  the 
author's  native  or  adopted  language,  or  in  doubtful  cases  in  the  form  proper  to 
the  language  in  which  he  has  written  most  of  his  works,  e.  g.  Pushkin,  Aleksandr 
Sergieevich,  not  Alexander. 


lO  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

In  German  and  Swedish  forenames,  when  there  is  doubt  between  ph  and/,  or  c 
and  k,  /  and  k  are  to  be  preferred,  e.  g.  Adolf  rather  than  Adolph,  Karl  rather 
than  Carl.  In  names  of  classical  origin  ae  is  to  be  preferred  to  e — Aegidius,  not 
Egidius. 

28  Unused  forenames.  Omit  forenames  not  used  by  the  author  and  not 
represented  by  initials  on  the  title-pages  of  his  works,  e.  g.  Conradi,  Bruno,  nol 
Karl  Paul  Bruno;  Dickens,  Charles,  not  Charles  John  HufTam. 

If  in  such  cases  it  is  deemed  better  to  give  the  full  name,  the  following  form  of  entry 
may  l>e  adopted:  Levasseur,  £mile  i.e.  Pierre  £mile.    Refer  from  the  form  not  adopted. 

29  Forenames  with  variants.  Give  forenames  which  have  a  distinct  variant 
in  the  form  of  the  variant  whenever  the  author  uses  it  regularly.  Refer  from 
the  original  form  when  necessary. 

Droysen,  Hans,  with  reference  from  Droysen,  Johannes. 
Reuter,  Fritz,  with  reference  from  Reuter,  Friedrich. 
Whitman,  Walt. 
Carleton,  Will. 

A  large  minority  of  the  (British)  Library  association  committee  favor  entry  under  the 
original  name,  while  admitting  that  popular  libraries  should  choose  the  variant  whenever 
the  author  uses  it  regularly. 

30  Compound  forenames.  Forenames  that  appear  combined  in  one  word  are 
not  to  be  separated  into  their  component  parts  unless  it  is  known  that  the  sep- 
arate form  represents  the  author's  own  usage. 

Martini,  Giambattista,  not  Giovanni  Battista. 

ENTRY   UNDER   FORENAME,    TITLE,    ETC. 

31  Popes,  sovereigns,  etc.    Enter  under  forenames  sovereigns,  ruling  princes, 

popes,  saints,  and  other  persons*  known  by  their  forenames  only.    (r/.  45,  46,  48) 

Charles  II,  king  of  Great  Britain. 
Albert  I,  prince  of  Monaco. 
Karl,  landgrave  of  Hesse-Cassel 
Pius  II,  pope. 
Athanasius,  Saint. 
Giraldus  Cambrensis. 
Geoffrey  of  Monmouth. 
Thomas  the  Rhymer. 

32  Princes  of  the  blood.    In  general,  enter  members  of  the  immediate  families 

of  sovereigns  under  their  forenames  and  refer  from  their  titles;  but  enter  under 

their  title  those  who  are  decidedly  better  known  by  these  designations. 

Carlos,  Don,  infante  of  Spain. 
George,  prince  of  Wale.1. 

hut 
Orleans,  Gaston  Jean  Baptiste,  dttc  d'. 
Conti,  Marie  Anne  de  Bourbon,  princesse  de. 

'   (British)  Library  association  rule:   Enter  mcml)ers  of  the  immediate  families  of 
J  sovereigns  under  their  forenames  and  refer  from  their  titles. 

•  Until  the  14th  century  the  presumption  is  in  favor  of  the  forename  rather  than  the  by- 
name as  entry  word. 


PERSONAL    authors:     UNDER    WHAT    PART    OR    FORM    OF    NAME       II 

33  Noblemen.  Enter  a  nobleman  under  his  latest  title  unless  he  is  decidedly 
better  known  by  the  family  name  or  an  earlier  title.  In  either  case  refer  from 
the  name  not  adopted  as  entry  word.  (Cutter,  25-26.  Eclectic,  28-31  and 
p.  66-67,  note) 

Kelvin,  William  Thomson,  ist  baron. 

Tennyson,  Alfred  Tennyson,  75^  baron. 

Avebury,  John  Lubbock,  isl  baron. 

Salisbury,  Robert  Arthur  Talbot  Gascoyne-Cecil,  jd  marquess  of. 

Lytton,  Edward  George  Earle  Lytton  Bulwer-Lytton,  ist  baron. 

Saint-Simon,  Louis  de  Rouvroy,  due  de. 

but 
Bacon,  Francis,  viscount  Si.  Albans. 
Walpole,  Horace,  4th  earl  of  Orford. 

(British)  Library  association  rule:  Enter  a  nobleman  under  his  family  name  and 
refer  from  his  titles. 

Lubbock,  John,  ist  baron  Avebury. 

34  Ecclesiastical  dignitaries.  Enter  ecclesiastical  dignitaries,  except  those 
mentioned  in  31,  under  their  surnames.  In  the  case  of  bishops  and  archbishops 
of  the  Church  of  England,  refer  from  the  names  of  their  sees. 

Davidson,  Randall  Thomas,  abp.  of  Canterbury. 

Colenso,  Joseph  William,  bp.  of  Natal. 

Wilberforce,  Samuel,  successively  bp.  of  Oxford  and  Winchester. 

TITLES,    DESIGNATIONS,    AND   EPITHETS    TO    BE   ADDED   IN   THE   HEADING 

35  Titles  of  nobility,  etc.  Add  in  the  heading  titles  and  designations  which 
indicate  nobility  and  the  higher  offices  or  ranks  when  they  are  commonly  used 
in  referring  to  a  person.  Foreign  titles  are  to  be  given  in  English  when  the  fore- 
name is  entry  word,  otherwise  in  the  vernacular.*  (Cutter,  214-216.  Eclectic, 
446-452) 

Karl,  archduke  of  Austria. 
Karl  Ludwig,  elector  palatine. 

but 
Humboldt,  Wilhelm,  freiherr  von. 
Mirabeau,  Honore  Gabriel  Riquetti,  comte  de. 

In  Cutter  214  will  be  found  a  full  explanation  of  the  titles  of  Englishwomen,  cf.  also 
Eclectic,  452. 

36  Epithets,  etc.,  added  when  forename  becomes  entry  word.  Add  to  the 

forename  when  it  is  used  as  entry  word  any  epithet,  by-name,  or  adjective  of 
origin,  nationality,  etc.,  by  which  the  person  is  usually  known. 

Kazimierz  HI,  Wielki,  king  of  Poland. 

Joannes  Eleemosynarius,  .Saint,  patriarch  of  Alexandria. 

Gulielmus  Alvernus,  bp.  of  Paris. 

37  Dates  and  designations.  Distinguish  persons  of  the  same  name  by  adding 
in  the  headings  the  dates  of  birth  and  death  or  descriptive  designations  denoting 
profession,   occupation,   etc. 

When  the  years  of  birth  and  death  are  easily  ascertainable  they  should  be 

*  Library  of  Congress  uses  the  English  form  for  such  titles  as  bishop,  archbishop,  cardinal. 


12  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

added  in  the  heading  even  if  not  necessary  at  the  time  for  distinguishing  persons 

of  the  same  name. 

(Cutter,  213) 

Smith,  John,  1536-16 16. 

Smith,  John,  1 580-1 631. 

Smith,  John,  clock-maker. 

Smith,  John,  of  MaJlon,  Eng. 

Smith,  John,  rector  of  Baldock 

Smith,  John,  surgeon  and  trading  captain. 

PSEUDONYMS,    CHANGE   OF    NAME,    ETC. 

38  Pseudonyms.    Enter  under  the  pseudonym  of  a  writer  when  the  real  name 

is  not  known,  and  add  the  abbreviation  pseud,  in  the  heading.*    Make  added 

entry  under  the  title.    (Cutter,  7,  97,  204-205.    Eclectic,  64-79) 

Adams,  Mary,  pseud.  Confessions  of  a  wife,  by  Mary  Adams,  with  illustra- 
tions by  (".ranville  Smith. 

iFrench,  Alice  1    E.xpiation,  by  Octave  Thanet  ipseud.] 

39  Sobriquets,  nicknames,  etc.  In  a  few  cases,  chiefly  names  of  artists,  a 
universally  used  sobriquet  or  nickname  is  to  be  selected  as  entry  word,  provided 
it  is  not  one  of  the  forenames  of  the  person  in  question.    (Cutter,  24a.    Eclectic, 

407) 

Tintoretto  i.e.  Jacopo  Robusti,  known  as  (with  reference  from  Robusti) 
Giorgione  i.e.  Giorgio  Barbarelli,  known  as  (with  reference  from  Barbarelli) 

40  Change  of  name — general  rule.  Enter  a  person  who  has  changed  his 
name  under  the  latest  form,  unless  an  earlier  one  is  decidedly  better  known. 
This  includes  cases  in  which  merely  the  spelling  of  the  name  has  been  altered. 
Refer  from  the  form  not  selected  as  entry  word. 

Stretton,  Hesba,  originally  Hannah  Smith. 
Lindenbruch,  Friedrich,  with  reference  from  Lindenbrog. 
Wiilker,  Richard,  with  reference  from  W'iilcker. 
Fiske,  John,  with  reference  from  Green,  Edmund  Fiske. 

(British)  Library  association  rule:  In  the  case  of  authors  who  change  their  name 
or  add  to  it  a  second  after  having  begun  to  publish  under  the  first,  the  heading  is  to  consist 
of  the  original  name  followed  by  the  word  afterwards  and  the  name  subsequently  adopted. 
(British  museum  Rules,  11) 

41  Married  women.  Enter  a  married  woman  under  her  latest  name  unless 
she  has  consistently  written  under  an  earlier  one  (either  her  maiden  name  or  the 
name  of  a  former  husband)  In  either  case  refer  from  the  name  not  selected  as 
entry  word. 

*  The  Library  of  Congress  enters  uncicr  pseudonym  a  few  authors  who,  besides  having 
written  exclusively  under  their  pseudonyms,  arc  decidedly  better  known  in  literar>'  history 
by  their  assumed  than  by  their  real  names. 

Eliot,  George,  pseud,  of  Marian  Evans,  afterwards  Cross.  George  Eliot's  life 
as  related  in  her  letters  and  journals,  arranged  and  edited  by  her  husband,  J.  \V. 
Cross  ... 

Added  entry:     Cross,  John  Walter,  ed. 
An  exception  is  also  made  in  the  case  of  two  or  more  authors  who  have  written  together 
under  one  pseudonym,  when  for  practical  reasons  entry  under  the  pseudonym  is  often  pre- 
ferable. 

Tilton,  Dwight,  pseud.  0/ George  Tilton  Richardson  and  Wilder  Dwight  Quint. 
On  Satan's  mount,  by  Dwight  Tilton  ...  illustrations  by  Charles  H.  Stephens. 


PERSONAL    authors:     UNDER    WHAT    PART    OR    FORM    OF    NAME        1 3 

The  heading  is  to  consist  of  (a)  husband's  surname,  (b)  her  own  forenames, 

and  (c)  her  maiden  name,  when  known,  in  parenthesis. 

Stowe,  Mrs.  Emily  Howard  (Jennings) 
Hopkins,  Mrs.  Sarah  (Drake)  Garretson. 
Jackson,  Mrs.  Helen  Maria  (Fiske)  Hunt. 
Soyaux,  Frau  Frieda  (Schanz) 
Gasparin,  Valerie  (Boissier)  comiesse  de. 

When  a  woman  uses  her  husband's  forenames  or  initials  in  place  of  her  own  on 

the  title-pages  of  her  books,  add  this  form  in  the  heading  and  refer  from  it. 

Hinkson,  Katharine  (Tynan)  "Mrs.  H.  A.  Hinkson." 
Wfird,  Mary  Angela  (Arnold)  "Mrs.  Humphry  Ward." 

Examples  of  married  women  who  are  to  be  entered  under  the  maiden  name  or  the  name  of 
a  former  husband : 

Bell,  Lilian  Lida,  "Mrs.  A.  H.  Bogue." 

Potter,  Margaret  Horton,  "Mrs.  J.  D.  Black." 

Wiggin,  Kate  Douglas  (Smith)  "Mrs.  G.  C.  Riggs." 

Bronte,  Charlotte,  with  reference  from  Nicholls,  Mrs.  Charlotte  (Brontg) 

(Cutter,  24c.     Eclectic,  34-36,  431-433) 

(British)  Library  association  rule:  Enter  a  married  woman  under  the  earliest  name 
which  she  has  used  as  an  authdr.     Refer  from  later  names. 

Robinson,  Agnes  Mary  Frances,  afterwards  Mrs.  James  Darmesteter,  afterwards 
Mme.  Duclaux,  with  references  from  Darmesteter,  Mrs.  James,  and  Duclaux, 
Mme. 

42  Variations  due  to  language,  transliteration,  etc.  When  a  person  regu- 
larly uses  a  foreign  form  of  his  name,  enter  under  this  form. 

Leschetizky,  Theodor,  not  Leszctycki,  Teodor. 
Tschermak,  Gustav,  not  Cermak. 

This  practice  applies  to  authors  whose  works  have  originally  appeared  in  a 
foreign  or  adopted  tongue,  and  whose  names  may  therefore  be  given  in  the  form 
thus  adopted  by  them. 

Follow  this  practice  also  in  the  case  of  transliterated  names,  if  the  author  has 
himself  consistently  used  a  particular  form  when  among  foreigners,  or  is  always 
known  by  a  transliteration  differing  from  the  one  provided  for  in  these  rules. 

Rangabe,  not  Rankabes. 
Vlachos,  not  Blachos. 

{cf.  Appendix  2;  also  Eclectic,  377-383) 

43  Writers  of  the  middle  ages  and  the  renaissance  and  reformation  periods. 

Authors  of  the  middle  ages  and  the  renaissance  and  reformation  periods  who 

have  translated  their  names  into  one  of  the  classic  languages,  or  who,  with  or 

without  reference  to  the  original,  have  adopted  a  name  Greek  or  Latin  in  form, 

are  to  be  entered  under  the  adopted  form. 

Agricola,  Rudolf,  not  Bauer. 
Xylander,  Wilhelm,  not  Holtzmann. 
Melanchthon,  Philipp,  not  Schwarzcrd. 
Oecolampadius,  Johannes,  not  Hausschein. 

On  the  other  hand,  enter  under  the  original  name  when  it  has  become  firmly 
established,  through  the  author's  own  usage  or  otherwise,  so  that  he  is  known  by 
that  rather  than  by  the  adopted  name. 
Reuchlin,  Johann,  not  Capnion. 

In  either  case  refer  from  the  form  of  name  not  adopted  as  entry  word. 


14  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

44  Post-reformation  and  modem  writers  known  mider  a  Latin  form.  Post- 
reformation  and  modern  wTiters  whose  names  are  found  both  in  a  Latin  form 
and  in  the  vernacular  are  to  be  entered  under  the  Latin  form  whenever  this 
is  decidedly  better  known.    Reference  is  to  be  made  from  the  vernacular. 

Grotius,  Hugo,  with  reference  from  Groot,  Hugo  van. 

bul 
Ritschl,  Friedrich  Wilhelm,  not  Ritschelius,  Fridericus. 

45  Popes.  Give  names  of  popes  in  Latin  and  refer  from  the  vernacular  form 
of  the  forename  and  from  the  family  name. 

Pius  n,  pope,  with  reference  from  Pio  and  from  Piccolomini,  Enea  Silvio. 

46  Sovereigns.    Give  names  of  sovereigns  in  the  vernacular  and  refer  from 

the  English  form.* 

Franz  Joseph  I,  emperor  of  A  ustria. 
Friedrich  I,  Barbarossa,  emperor  of  Germany. 
Wilhelm  II,  German  emperor. 
Henri  IV,  king  of  France. 
Umberto  I,  king  of  Italy. 

47  Bible  characters.  Give  names  of  Bible  characters  in  English,  and  as  far 
as  possible  in  the  form  in  which  they  appear  in  the  authorized  version. 

James,  Saint,  apostle. 

48  Saints.  Give  names  of  saints  other  than  Bible  characters  in  Latin,  unless 
they  are  decidedly  better  known  under  the  vernacular  or  some  other  form. 

Latin  form  — 
Benedictus,  Saint,  abbot  of  Monte  Cassino. 
Gregorius,  Saint,  bp.  of  Tours. 

Joannes  Eleemosynarius,  Saint,  patriarch  of  Alexandria. 
Zeno,  Saint,  bp.  of  Verona. 
Vincentius  Lerinensis,  Saint. 

Vernacular  form  — 
Birgitta,  Saint,  of  Sweden. 
Bernard  de  Clairvaux,  Saint. 
Genevieve,  Saint  of  Paris, 

English  form  — 
Patrick,  Saint. 
Augustine,  Saint,  abp.  of  Canterbury. 

GREEK,    LATIN,   AND   ORIENTAL   WRITERS 

49  Ancient  Greek  writers.  Enter  ancient  Greek  authors  under  the  Latin 
form  of  their  names  and  refer  from  the  English  and  occasionally  from  the  Greek 
form.  In  selecting  the  proper  entry  word  for  the  names  of  ancient  Greeks  follow 
the  practice  of  the  classical  dictionaries  (Smith's  Dictionary  of  Greek  and  Ro- 
man biography;  Engelmann's  Bibliotheca  scriptorum  classicorum;  Harper's 
Dictionary  of  classical  literature  and  antiquities) 

Homerus,  with  reference  from  Homer. 
Aeschylus,  with  reference  from  Aischylos. 

•  Library  of  Congress  enters  sovereigns  of  nations  not  using  alphabets  in  roman  or  gothic 
characters  under  the  English  form.  e.g.  Paul  i,  emperor  of  Russia  (not  Pavel  i);  Catharine  H. 
empress  of  Russia  {not  Ekaterina  II) 


PERSONAL    authors:     UNDER    WHAT    PART    OR    FORM    OF    NAME        1 5 

50  Byzantine  writers.  Enter  Byzantine  authors  under  the  personal  or  bap- 
tismal name  in  the  Latin  form.  A  reference  is  usually  to  be  made  from  the  sur- 
name, especially  when  it  has  become  a  family  name.    (Instruktionen,  58) 

Georgius  Pisides,  Georgius  Syncellus,  with  references  from  Pisides,  Syncellus. 

Anna  Comnena,  Joannes  Tzetzes,  with  references  from  Comnena,  Tzetzes. 
but 

Georgius  Monachus,  Maximus  Confessor,  Theodorus  Anagnosies,  without  refer- 
ences from  Monachus,  Confessor,  Anagnostes. 

51  Classic  Latin  writers.  Enter  Latin  authors  in  accordance  with  the  prac- 
tice of  the  classical  dictionaries  (cf.  49) 

When  it  is  doubtful  which  of  two  names  has  been  preferred  as  entry  word  by 
the  best  authorities,  enter  under  the  first  and  refer  from  the  second. 
Martianus  Capella,  with  reference  from  Capella. 
The  original  Latin  form  of  the  name  is  to  be  adopted,  with  reference  from  the 
English  form  whenever  the  latter  differs  from  the  original. 
Horatius  Flaccus,  Quintus,  with  reference  from  Horace. 

52  Oriental  writers :  Arabic,  Turkish,  etc.  Arabic  and  other  writers  (espe- 
cially Turkish  and  Persian)  living  in  Mohammedan  countries  and  following 
Mohammedan  practice,  are  to  be  entered  under  the  personal  name,  followed  by 
the  names  expressing  relationship  (compounds  with  abu,  father,  ibn,  son,  etc.) 
and  by  any  special  name  or  names  derived  either  from  the  author's  place  of 
birth  or  from  some  circumstance  connected  with  his  life  and  character.  The 
portion  of  the  name  preceding  the  personal  name  is  to  be  transposed  in  the 
heading  similarly  to  the  transposition  of  Christian  forenames.  References  are 
to  be  made  from  each  of  the  various  names.* 

The  article  al  is  always  to  be  written  out,  but  is  to  be  ignored  in  the  arrange- 
ment when  it  precedes  the  name  under  which  entry  is  made.f 

Mufiammad  ibn  Zakariya,  Abu  Bakr,  al-Razl,  with  references  from  Abu  Bakr 
MuHammad  ibn. Zakariya,  al-Rdzl;  al-Razi;  Rasis;  Rhases. 

Abu  Bakr  ibn  al-Tufail,  Abu  Ja'  far,  al-Ishlntt,  with  references  from  Abu  Ja' 
far  ibn  al-Tufail,  al-Ishlnll;  Ibn  al-Tufail;  al-Ishbili. 

Exceptions  are  to  be  made  where  a  name  other  than  the  personal  name  more 
readily  distinguishes  the  author,  or  where  a  particular  form  of  the  name  has 
become  established  in  western  literature. 

Abu  al-Wafa,  al-Buzjanl,  with  references  from  Muhammad  ibn  MuKammad, 

Abu  al-Wafa,  al-Buzjanl;  al-Buzjani;  Aboul-Wefa. 
Averroes,  with  references  from  MuKammad  ibn  AHmad,  Abu  al-Walid,  called 

Ibn  Rushd;  Ibn  Rushd;  Abu  al-VValid  Muhammad  ibn  AKmad.coi/et^lbn  Rushd. 

See  also  examples  under  56. 

53  Hebrew  writers.  Hebrew  writers  prior  to  the  19th  century,  unless  de- 
cidedly better  known  under  a  European  form  of  name,  are  to  be  entered  under 
the  given  name  of  the  author  followed  by  that  of  his  father  or  by  some  designa- 
tion referring  to  the  city  of  his  birth  or  residence,  to  his  profession,  or  to  his 

*  Library  of  Congress  printed  cards  follow  in  the  main  the  form  of  heading  adopted  in  the 
catalogs  of  the  British  museum. 

t  Many  will  prefer  to  transjwse  the  article,  writing  it  at  the  end  followed  by  a  hyphen  to 
indicate  its  connection  with  the  name. 


1 6  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

rank.  When  the  proper  names  of  Hebrew  writers  begin  with  ben,  obi,  or  oft, 
these  should  begin  the  heading,  as  they  form  an  integral  part  of  these  names. 
The  same  holds  true  of  bar  in  Syriac  names. 

The  article  is  always  to  be  written  ha-.  When  this  precedes  the  name  of  the 
writer  it  is  to  be  ignored  in  the  arrangement.* 

A  Hebrew  writer  who  has  written  both  in  Hebrew  and  in  Arabic  is  to  be  en- 
tered under  his  Hebrew  designation  with  reference  from  the  Arabic  name. 

Refer  from  the  various  forms  in  which  the  names  of  many  Hebrew  writers 
have  become  current.  The  Biblical  names  are  to  be  given,  as  far  as  possible,  in 
the  form  in  which  they  appear  in  the  authorized  version. 

Israel  ben  Eliezer,  Ba'al-Shem  Tob,  called  Besht,  with  references  from  Besht, 
Israel  Ikti  Eliezer,  called;  Ba'al-Shem  Tob,  Israel  ben  Eliezer. 

Judah,  ha- Levi,  with  references  from  Jehuda  Halevi;  Halevi,  Judah. 
but 

Maimonides,  with  references  from  Moses  ben  Maimon;  Rambam. 

Leo  Hebraeus,  with  reference  from  Abranavel,  Judah. 

54  Indie  names.  Indie  names  are  as  a  rule  to  be  entered  under  the  personal 
name  (usually  the  first)  with  reference  from  the  family  name  or  surname  (usually 
the  third)    When  there  are  only  two  names,  refer  from  the  second. f 

Mah&deva  Govinda  Ranade,  with  references  from  Ranade,  Mahadeva  Govinda; 
Govinda  Ranade,  Mahadeva. 

Where  family  names  have  been  adopted  according  to  western  usage,  enter 
under  the  family  name  and  refer  from  the  personal  name. 

Dutt,  Romesh  Chunder,  with  reference  from  Romesh  Chunder  Dutt. 

55  Other  Oriental  names.  Oriental  names  not  provided  for  above  {cf.  52- 
54)  are  usually  treated  like  the  Indie,  except  when,  like  the  Armenian,  they  are 
formed  according  to  western  usage;  in  that  ease  they  are  to  be  treated  like 
modern  family  names,  e.g.  Hagopian,  Hovhan. 

56  Oriental  names  known  imder  western  forms.  Oriental  names  for  which 
particular  forms  have  become  firmly  established  in  western  literature  are  to  be 
entered  under  these  forms  with  reference  from  the  original. 

Avipenna,  with  references  from  Abu  'All  al-Husain  ibn  'Abd  Allah  ibn  Sin5;  al- 

Husiiin  ibn  'Abd  Allah  ibn  Sina,  Abu  'Ali;  Ibn  Sina. 
Confucius,  with  references  from  Kung-Kew;  Kung  F'u-tze. 

See  also  example  Averroes  (exception  to  52) 

For  transliteration  of  names  of  Oriental  writers  see  Appendix  2,  also  Instruktionen, 
p.  50-55,  Eclectic,  338-343. 

For  list  of  Oriental  titles  and  occupations,  with  their  signification,  see  Eclectic,  p.  76-97. 

EDITORS,    ETC. 

57  Editors,  etc.  The  names  of  editors,  translators,  continuators,  etc.  are 
subject  to  the  same  rules  as  the  names  of  authors.    (Eclectic,  1 76) 

*  Many  will  prefer  to  transpose  the  article  and  write  it  at  the  end.     {cf.  foot-note  to  52) 
t  Library  of  Congress  printed  cards  follow  in  the  main  the  form  of  heading  adopted  in  the 
catalogs  of  the  British  museum. 


CORPORATE    BODIES    AS    AUTHORS:     GOVERNMENT    PUBLICATIONS        1 7 
c)  CORPORATE  BODIES  AS  AUTHORS 
GOVERNMENT   PUBLICATIONS 

Specification.  Governments  (states,  provinces,  municipalities,  ecclesiastical, 
military,  or  judicial  districts)  are  to  be  considered  as  authors  of  their  official 
publications. 

58  General  rule.    Enter  under  names  of  countries,  states,  cities,  towns,  etc.* 

official  publications  issued  by  them  or  under  their  auspices.    The  names  of  the 

departments,  bureaus,  etc.  from  which  the  publications  emanate  are  to  be  given 

as  subheadings. 

Great  Britain.     Parliament. 
Prussia.     Ministerium  des  innern. 
U.  S.     Department  of  state. 

In  the  entry  of  government  publications,  use  for  a  subheading  the  name  of  the 
office  rather  than  the  title  of  the  officer,  e.g.  Bureau  of  education,  not  Com- 
missioner of  education.     (Cutter,  53) 

Make  a  general  reference  from  the  name  of  the  head  of  a  department  to  the 

name  of  the  office. 

Wilson,  James,  see  also  U.  S.   Department  of  agriculture. 

Occasionally  the  title  of  the  officer  is  the  only  name  of  the  office.  In  that  case  it  is  to  be 
adopted  as  subheading. 

Illinois.     State  entomologist. 

The  name  o'  the  occupant  of  the  office,  preceded  by  the  dates  of  his  incumbency,  may 
be  added  to  such  subheadings  as  President,  Governor,  Mayor,  etc.,  in  order  to  bring  to- 
gether the  publications  issued  during  a  given  administration. 

U.  S.     President,  1 789-1 797  {Washington) 

59  Bureaus  or  offices  subordinate  to  a  department.  Enter  government 
bureaus  or  offices  subordinate  to  a  department  directly  under  the  country,  not 
as  subheadings  under  the  department. 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  insular  affairs,  with  references  from 

U.  S.  Insular  affairs.  Bureau  of. 

U.  S.  War  department.     Bureau  of  insular  affairs. 
U.  S.     Hydrographic  office,  with  reference  from 

U.  S.   Navy  department.      Hydrographic  office. 
Italy.    Direzione  generate  dei  telegrafi,  with  references  from 

Italy.      Telegrafi,  Direzione  generate  dei. 

Italy.     Ministero  dei  tavori  pubblici.     Direzione  generate  dei  telegrafi. 

Italy.     Ministero  delle  paste  e  dei  telegrafi.     Direzione  generate  dei  telegrafi. 
I*russia.     Statistisches  tandesamt,  with  reference  from 

Prussia.     Ministerium  des  innern.     Statistisches  tandesamt. 

The  Publishing  board  and  Librar>'  of  Congress  enter  names  of  departments,  bureaus, 
etc.  in  their  direct  form.  Many  libraries  will  prefer  the  inverted  form,  e.  g.  U.  S.  Educa- 
tion, Bureau  of;  Massachusetts.  Agriculture,  State  board  of.  {cf.  U.  S.  Supt.  of  documents. 
Author  headings  for  U.  S.  public  documents,  1903) 

Still  another  form  has  been  adopted  in  Bowker's  "State  publications."  m. 
New  Hampshire.     [Agriculture]     Board  of  agriculture. 
Vermont.     [Insane]     Supen'isors  of  the  insane. 

A  fourth  phm  which  offers  advantages,  particularly  for  a  printed  card  catalog,  is  to  print 
the  distinctive  word  or  words  of  the  subheading  in  a  special  type  {e.  g.  gothic)     This  affords 

*  In  the  English  form.  cf.  130,  Geographic  headings. 


1 8  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

a  choice  as  to  arrangement  (tinder  first  word  or  tinder  catchword)  without  requiring  any 
changes  in  the  heading. 

U.  S.     Bureau  of  education. 

Minor  divisions  and  offices  are  usually  to  be  subordinated  to  the  bureaus  or 

departments  of  which  they  form  a  part. 

U.  S.     Department  of  agriailture.     Division  of  botany. 
U.S.     Bureau  of  animal  industry.     Dairy  division. 
U.  S.     Library  of  Congress.     Division  of  documents. 

60  Reports  not  by  an  oflBicial.  Enter  under  the  writer  reports  made  to  a 
department  by  a  person  who  is  not  an  official,  with  added  entry  under  the  name 
of  the  department. 

This  rule  may  be  applied  also  in  dealing  with  publications  of  private  firms  or  companies, 
the  main  entry  usually  being  made  under  the  name  of  the  firm  when  the  compiler  or  editor 
is  a  regular  oft'icial  and  the  work  of  compilation  or  editing  is  a  part  of  his  official  duties. 
On  the  other  hand,  main  entry  is  made  under  the  individual  when  it  is  known  that  the  work 
is  his  own  private  publication.  In  either  case,  added  entry  or  reference  is  made  under  the 
party  not  selected  as  main  heading. 

61  Collection  or  series  of  reports.  Enter  a  collection  or  series  of  reports  to 
a  department,  by  different  persons,  under  the  department.  If  the  importance  or 
manner  of  publication  of  the  single  reports  warrants  it,  make  an  added  entry 
or  analytical  for  each  under  the  author's  name,  even  if  he  is  an  official.  No 
added  entry  need  be  made  under  the  name  of  an  official  for  a  report  of  strictly 
administrative  or  routine  character  (cf.  58,  ^3) 

U.  S.  Geological  survey.  ...  Reconnaissances  in  the  Cape  Nome  and  Norton 
Bay  regions,  Alaska,  in  1900,  bv  Alfred  H.  Brooks,  George  B.  Richardson,  Arthur 
J.  Collier  and  Walter  C.  Mencicnhall. 

Added  entries:     I.  Brooks,  Alfred  Hulse.    2.  Richardson,  George  Burr. 
3.  Collier,  Arthur  James.    4.  Mendenhall,  Walter  Curran. 

62  Laws.  Enter  laws  (including  general  collections,  codes,  laws  on  particular 
subjects,  single  acts,  etc.)  under  the  name  of  the  country  or  state,  with  added 
entry  under  the  name  of  the  compiler  or  editor. 

Headings  are  to  follow  the  form  prescribed  in  A.  R.  Hasse's  "U.  S.  government  publi- 
cations," e.  g.  U.  S.  Statutes,  rather  than  U.  S.  Congress.* 

U.  S.  Statutes.  Revised  statutes  of  the  United  States,  passed  at  the  first  ses- 
sion of  the  Forty-third  Congress,  i873-'74  ...  Edited,  printed,  and  published 
under  the  authority  of  an  act  of  Congress,  and  under  the  direction  of  the  secre- 
tary of  state. 

*  Library  of  Congress  uses  subheading  Lmws,  statutes,  etc. 

Examples : 

a)  Collections: 

Gt.  Brit     Laws,  statutes,  etc. 

b)  Laws  (single  laws  or  collections)  promulgated  during  a  given  reign: 
Gt.  Brit     Laws,  statutes,  etc.,  1837-igoi  {Victoria) 

c)  Single  laws  of  the  United  States: 

U.  S.     Laws,  statutes,  etc.,  i88Q-i8go  (jist  Cong.,  ist  sess.) 
Instead  of  adding  to  the  heading  for  single  laws  the  inclusive  years  of  a  reign,  administra- 
tion or  session,  libraries  that  prefer  a  strictly  chronological  arrangement  should  add  the  ex- 
act year  of  enactment. 


CORPORATE    BODIES    AS    AUTHORS:     GOVERNMENT    PUBLICATIONS       IQ 

A  general  reference  should  be  made  from  the  name  of  ihe  legislative  body,  e.  g.  U.  S. 
Congress.     [Laws]  see  U.  S.  Statutes. 

Cutter,  3d  ed.,  41.  and  Eclectic,  183-184,  also  enter  acts,  laws,  etc.  under  country  or  state, 
but  with  the  name  of  the  legislative  body  as  subdivision,  e.  g.  U.  S.  Congress;  Great  Britain. 
Parliament;  Massachusetts.    General  court. 

The  latter  plan  offers  an  alternative  which  may  be  preferred  by  those  who  object  to  the 
subdivisions  suggested  under  the  main  rule  on  the  ground  that  they  introduce  form  or  sub- 
ject entries  into  the  author  catalog.  Libraries  which  have  extensive  collections  of  laws, 
particularly  of  foreign  laws,  will,  however,  find  it  simpler  to  follow  the  main  rule.  Attempts 
to  arrange  all  legislative  enactments  of  a  country  under  the  name  of  the  legislative  body 
or  the  ruling  power,  the  names  of  which  are  in  some  countries  subject  to  frequent  changes, 
are  likely  to  prove  perplexing  and  unsatisfactory. 

Headings  for  city  ordinances  are  to  follow  the  form  prescribed  in  A.  R.  Hasse's  "  U.  S. 
government  publications,"  e.  g.  Brooklyn.    Ordinances. 

63  Digests  of  laws,  compilations,  etc.  When  the  original  text  of  the  laws 
digested  or  annotated  has  been  quoted  only  in  part,  or  in  a  fragmentary  manner, 
or  when  the  contribution  of  the  digester  or  annotator  forms  the  main  feature  of 
the  book,  enter  under  the  digester  with  added  entry  or  reference  under  the 
name  of  the  country. 

In  doubtful  cases  enter  as  in  62,  viz.  main  entry  under  country,  added  entry 

under  digester  or  annotator. 

Manresa  y  Navarro,  Jose  Maria.     Comentarios  al  Codigo  civil  espafiol,  per 
D.  Jose  .Maria  Manresa  y  Navarro ...  con  lacolaboracion  de  varios  jurisconsultos ... 
Added  entry:  Spain.  Statutes. 

64  Law  reports.  Enter  reports  of  a  single  court  under  its  name  with  added 
entry  under  the  name  of  the  reporter,  editor,  or  collector,  as  the  case  may  be. 

The  form  of  heading  is  to  be: 

1  Name  of  country,  state,  or  province  (city  or  town  in  the  case  of  local  courts) 

2  Name  of  court. 

New  York  (5/fl/e)  Court  of  appeals.  Transcript  appeals  ...  The  file  of  opinions 
in  cases  argued  before  the  Court  of  appeals  of  the  state  of  New  York,  during  the 
January  term,  1867  [-June  term,  18681  From  official  copies  certified  by  Joel 
Tiffany,  state  reporter. 

Added  entry:    Tiffany,  Joel. 

Great  Britain.     Court  for  the  consideration  ofcrmon  cases  reserved.    Crown  cases 

reserved  for  consideration;  and  decided  by  the  twelve  judges  of  Kngland,  from 

the  year  1799  to  the  year  1824.    By  William  Oldnall  Russell  and  Kdward  Ryan  ... 

Added  entries:     i.  Russell,  Sir  William  Oldnall.    2.  Ryan,  Sir  Edward. 

65  Digests  of  reports.  Enter  digests  of  reports  under  the  digester;  if  anony- 
mous, under  the  title.  Make  added  entry  under  the  name  of  the  court  or  judge 
whenever  the  digest  is  limited  to  the  reports  of  a  particular  court,  and  under  the 
title  of  the  collection  or  set  of  reports  digested,  provided  it  is  frequently  referred 

to  by  its  title. 

Morrison,  Robert  Stewart.  Colorado  digest;  containing  the  decisions  of 
the  Supreme  court,  Court  of  appeals  and  ftxleral  courts  of  the  state  as  reported 
in  volumes  1-25  Colorado  reports.  1-13  Court  of  appeals  reports  the  contempo- 
raneous Pacific  reporters,  i-ioo  FtM:leraI  rcixirters,  101-178  U  S.  rcjwrts  and 
local  reports,  with  table  of  cases  digested,  with  their  citations,  and  table  of  over- 
ruled cases,  by  R.  S.  Morrison  ... 


20  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

66  Opinions,  decisions,  charges.  Enter  a  single  opinion,  decision,  or  charge 
under  the  name  of  the  court,  with  added  entries  under  the  name  of  the  judge, 
parties  to  the  suit,  or  other  headings,  as  the  case  may  require  icf.  note  on  added 
entries  under  132,  Civil  actions) 

U.  S.  Circuit  court  {ist  circuit)  The  opinion  of  Judge  Story  in  the  case  of 
William  Allen  vs.  Joseph  McKeen,  treasurer  of  Bowdoin  college,  decided  in  the 
Circuit  court  of  the  United  States,  at  the  May  term  at  Portland,  1833. 

Added  entries:    i .  Story,  Joseph.   2.  Alien,  William.  3.  McKeen,  Joseph. 
4.  Bowdoin  college. 
U.  S.  Circuit  court  {8th  circuit)     ...     Decision  of  John  F.  Philips,  judge,  in 
Temple  lot  case.    The  Reorganized  church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter  day  saints 
v'ersus  the  Church  of  Christ,  et  al. 

Added  entries:     i.  Fiiilips,  John  F.     2.  Reorganized  church  of  Jesus 
Christ  of  Latter  day  saints.    3.  Independence,  Mo.    Church  of  Christ. 

67  Pleas.     Enter  a  plea  printed  separately  under  the  lawyer  who  makes  it. 

Whiting,  William.  Argument  of  William  Whiting,  esq.,  in  the  case  of  Ross 
Winans  v.  Orsanus  E^ton  et  al.,  for  an  alleged  infringement  of  his  patent  for  the 
eight-wheel  railroad  car.  Before  Hon.  Samuel  Nelson,  justice  of  the  United 
States  Circuit  court  for  the  northern  district  of  New  York.  Phonographicaily 
reported  by  Arthur  Cannon  ... 

Added  entries:    i.  Winans,  Ross.    2.  Eaton,  Orsanus. 

68  Constitutions.  Enter  constitutions  under  the  name  of  the  country  or 
state  with  subheading  Constitution.* 

U.  S.     Constitution. 
Switzerland.     Constitution. 

Arrange  by  date  of  publication  (imprint  date)  except  in  the  case  of  reprints  of  particu- 
lar issues,  which  are  to  be  arranged  under  date  of  the  original  issue,  subarranged  by  im- 
print dates. 

69  Constitutional  conventions.  Enter  constitutional  conventions  under  the 
name  of  the  state  with  subheading  Constitutional  convention,  followed  by  the 
date. 

New  Hampshire.     Constitutional  convention,  1902. 

70  Charters.    Enter  charters  under  the  name  of  the  country,  state,  city,  or 

corporate  body  for  whose  benefit  they  are  granted,  with  subheading  Charters, 

and  make  added  entry  under  the  name  of  the  sovereign  power  granting  them. 

Baltimore.     Charters.     The  new  charter  of  Baltimore  city.     Published  under 
resolution  of  the  City  council  of  Baltimore  city,  adopted  April  25,  1898. 
Added  entry:    Maryland.    Statutes. 

71  Treaties. 

I  Single  treaties.  Enter  treaties  under  the  party  named  first  on  the  title-page, 
with  subheading  Treaties,  and  make  added  entry  under  the  other  party  or 
parties.  Refer  from  the  name  of  the  place  when  the  treaty  is  commonly  called 
by  that  name,t  and  from  any  other  usual  appellation. 

Great  Britain.  Treaties,  1 763.  The  definitive  treaty  of  peace  and  friendship, 
between  His  Britannick  Majesty,  the  Most  Christian  King,  and  the  King  of 
Spain.  Concluded  at  Paris,  the  loth  day  of  Februar>',  1763.  To  which,  the 
King  of  Portugal  acceded  on  the  same  day.    Published  by  authority. 

Added  entries:    I.France.     Treaties.    2.  Spain.     Treaties.    3.    Portugal. 
Treaties. 
Refer  from  Paris,  Treaty  of,  1763. 

*  Library  of  Congress  gives  subheading  in  the  vernacular,  e.g.  Switzerland.  Bundesver- 
fassung. 

t  In  a  dictionary  catalog  a  form  or  subject  entry  usually  takes  the  place  of  a  reference. 


CORPORATE    BODIES    AS    AUTHORS:     SOCIETIES  21 

In  order  to  secure  a  chronological  arrangement  of  the  single  treaties  under  a  particu- 
lar country,  the  date  of  each  treaty  is  to  be  added  to  the  subheading.  {See  also  Library 
of  Congress  supplementary  rule  8,  below) 

2  Collections.  Enter  collections  of  treaties  of  several  countries  under  the 
compiler,    (cf.  126) 

Rockhill,  William  Woodville,  ed.  Treaties  and  conventions  with  or  concern- 
ing China  and  Korea,  1894-1904,  together  with  various  state  papers  and  docu- 
ments affecting  foreign  interests.    Ed.  by  William  VVrxxh  ille  RfKkhill  ... 

Added  entries:      i.   China.      Treaties.     2.  Korea.     Treaties.    3.   U.  S. 
Treaties. 

3  Collections  of  the  treaties  ot  a  particular  country  with  one  or  more  other 

countries  are  to  be  entered  under  the  name  of  the  country  which  is  a  party  to  all 

the  treaties,  even  though  it  is  not  the  one  mentioned  first  on  the  title-page. 

U.  S.  Treaties.  ...  Compilation  of  treaties  in  force.  Prepared  under  resolu- 
tion of  the  Senate,  of  February  11,  1904. 

Prepared  under  the  direction  of  the  Committee   on   foreign   relations, 
United  States  Senate,  by  William  M.  Malloy. 

Added  entries:     i.  U.  S.     Congress.    Senate.     Committee  on  foreign  rela- 
tions.   2.  Malloy,  William  M.,  comp. 

Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  8 
Treaties,  and  negotiations  with  foreign  powers 

Enter  treaties  under  the  party  named  first  on  the  title-page,  with  subheading  Treaties, 
etc.,  and  make  added  entry  under  the  other  party  or  parties.  Refer  from  the  name  of 
the  place  when  the  treaty  is  commonly  called  by  that  name,  and  from  any  other  usual 
appellation. 

Added  entries  are  to  be  made,  when  necessary,  for  the  countries,  with  subheadings: 
Dept.  of  state;  Foreign  office;  Ministere  des  affaires  etrangeres,  etc. ;  and  for  editors,  com- 
pilers, translators,  etc. 

The  entries  under  the  different  countries  are  to  be  arranged  in  two  general  groups: 
I.  Collections.  2.  Chronological  series,  (f/.  British  museum  Catalogue  —  England,  col. 
297-343) 

1  France.     Treaties,  etc. 

2  France.     Treaties,  etc.,  1380- 1422  {Charles   VT) 

SOCIETIES 

Specification.  This  includes  associations  and  societies  of  all  kinds,  scientific, 
benevolent,  moral,  etc.,  even  when  strictly  local  or  named  from  a  country,  state, 
county,  or  province,  also  clubs,  gilds,  orders  of  knighthood,  secret  societies, 
intercollegiate  societies,  Greek  letter  fraternities.  Young  men's  and  Young 
women's  Christian  associations,  affiliated  societies,  political  parties,  religious 
sects,  etc.,  as  distinguished  from  institutions  (establishments)  See  also  speci- 
fication for  institutions,  preceding  rule  82. 

72   General  rule.    Enter  a  society  under  the  first  word  (not  an  article)  of  its 

corporate  name,  with  reference  from  any  other  name  by  which  it  is  known, 

especially  from  the  name  of  the  place  where  its  headquarters  are  established.* 

Botanical  society  of  Edinburgh,  with  reference  from 
Edinburgh.     Botanical  society. 

*  Alternative :  Enter  all  societies  whose  names  include  that  of  some  Kx-ality  indicating  the 
home  of  the  society  or  the  territorial  limits  of  its  researches,  or  both,  under  the  name  of  that 
locality.  Societies  whose  names  do  not  include  that  of  some  locality  are  to  be  entered  under 
their  names. 


22  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

Entomological  society  of  New  South  Wales,  Sydney,  with  references  from  New 

South  Wales.     Entomological  society. 

Sydney.     Kntomological  stK'icty  of  New  South  Wales. 
Geographische  gesellschaft  in  Hamburg,  with  reference  from 

Haml)iirg.     C".eogra[)hische  gesellschaft. 
Academic  royale  des  sciences,  des  lettres  et  des  beaux-arts  de  Belgique, 

Brussels,  with  reference  from 

IJrusscls.  Academic  royale  des  sciences,  des  lettres  et  des  beaux-arts  de  Belgique. 
Academy  of  natural  sciences  of  Philadelphia,  with  reference  from 

Philadelphia.    Academy  of  natural  sciences. 

American  state  historical,  agricultural,  and  medical  societies,*  and  benevolent,  moral, 
and  similar  societies,  purely  local,  for  which  entry  under  the  place  is  prescribed  in  both 
Cutter  and  the  A.  L.  A.  Rules,  Advance  ed.,  are  not  considered  sufliciently  distinct  or 
well-defined  to  warrant  their  exception  from  the  general  rule.  For  libraries  which  prefer 
to  continue  the  practice  of  entering  them  under  the  place,  the  following  alternatives  may 
be  suggested: 

a)  American  state  societies. 

1  Enter  American  state  historical,  agricultural,  and  medical  societies,  whether  sup- 

ported by  the  state  or  not,  under  the  name  of  the  state,     (c/.  Cutter,  80.    A.  L.  A. 
Rules.  Advance  ed.,  28) 

2  Enter  all  American  state  societies  (historical,  agricultural,  medical,  horticultural, 

entomological,  etc.)  whether  supported  by  the  stale  or  not,  under  the  name  of 
the  state. 

b)  Benevolent  or  moral  societies,  purely  local. 

1  Enter  benevolent,  moral,  and  similar  societies,  purely  local,  under  the  name  of 

the  place. 

2  Enter  benevolent,  moral,  and  similar  local  societies  of  the  place  in  which  the  library 

itself  is  located  under  their  names,  similar  societies  in  other  places  under  the 
name  of  the  place. 

Exceptions,  variations,  and  further  specifications 

73  International  societies.  Enter  societies  extending  through  many  lands,  or 
having  authorized  names  in  many  languages,  under  the  English  form  if  it  is  used 
officially;  otherwise  under  that  official  form  of  the  name  which  occurs  most 

frequently. 

International  maritime  association,  with  reference  from  Association  internationale 
de  la  marine. 

International  council  for  the  study  of  the  sea,  with  references  from  Conseil  per- 
manent international  p<nir  Texploration  dc  la  mer;  Central-ausschuss  fiir  die 
internationale  meeresforschung. 

Internationale  erdmessung,  with  references  from  Association  geod^sique  interna- 
tionale; International  geodetical  asso<-iation. 

Comlt6  international  des  poids  et  mesures,  with  reference  from  International 
commission  of  weights  and  measures. 

Red  cross  (for  general  works) 

Red  cross.  U.  S.  American  national  Red  cross,  with  reference  from  American 
national  Red  cross. 

Red  cross.  Netherlands.  Vereeniging  tot  het  verleenen  van  hulp  aan  zieke  en 
gewonde  krijgslieden  in  tijd  van  oorlog,  with  reference  from  Vereeniging  letr.) 

74  Orders  of  knighthood,  secret  orders,  etc.    Enter  orders  of  knighthood, 

both  those  of  medieval  and  modern  times,  also  secret  orders  and  other  similar 

organizations,  under  their  names,  but  enter  the  American  Knights  templars  and 

other  regular  masonic  bodies  under  the  heading  Freemasons. 

I     Medieval  orders  (usually  to  be  entered  under  an  English  form  of  the  name)  — 

Elnights  of  Malta,  with  references  from  Knights  hospitalers  of  St.  John  of  Jeru- 
siilem;  Hospitalers  of  St.  John  of  Jerusalem,  etc. 

*  Library  of  Congress  enters  American  state  historical  and  agricultural  societies  under 
the  state. 


CORPORATE   BODIES   AS   AUTHORS:     GOVERNMENT   PUBLICATIONS         23 

Teutonic  knights,  with  references  from  Dcutschcr  orden;  Deutsche  ritter;  Order 

der  Ritter  des  hospitales  St.  Marien  in  Jerusiilem,  etc. 
Templars,  with  reference  from  Knights  templars  {Monastic  and  military  order) 

2  Modern  orders  — 

Order  of  the  Garter,  Knights  of  Pythias,  with  references  under  the  significant 
words  of  the  name. 

3  Masonic  bodies  — 

Freemasons.  Knights  templars,  with  references  from  Knights  templars  (Masonic 
order):    Templars  {Masonic  order) 

75  Alumni  associations.  Enter  alumni  associations  under  the  name  of  the 
school  or  college. 

Yale  university.     Society  of  alumni,  with  reference  from  Society  of  alumni  of 

Yale  university. 
Permsylvania  college,  Gettysburg.     Alumni  association,  with  reference  from 

Alumni  association  of  Pennsylvania  college. 

Smith  college.    Alumnae  association,  with  reference  from  Alumnae  association  of 

Smith  college. 
Paris.    £cole  des  chartes.    Societe  de  I'ficole  des  chartes,  with  reference  from 

Societe  de  I'ficole  des  chartes. 

76  Local  college  or  university  societies.    Enter  local  college  societies  under 

the  name  of  the  college. 

Columbia  university.  Philolexian  society,  with  reference  from  Philolexian  so- 
ciety, Columbia  university. 

77  Gilds.  Enter  gilds  under  the  name  of  the  city,  with  the  name  of  the  com- 
pany as  subheading. 

London.  Merchant  tailors'  company,  with  reference  from  .Merchant  tailors' 
company,  London. 

Dunfermline,  Scot.  Weavers'  incorporation,  with  reference  from  Weavers'  incor- 
poration, Dunfermline. 

Sheffield,  Eng.  Cutlers'  company,  with  reference  from  Cutlers'  company,  Sheffield. 

78  Learned  academies  whose  names  begin  with  K.  K.,  R.,  I.,  etc.  Enter 
learned  academies  under  the  first  word  not  an  article  or  an  adjective  expressing 
royal  privilege,  etc.  (K.  K.,  R.,  I.,  etc.)  Abbreviate  at  the  beginning  of  the 
names  the  words  Kaiserlich,  Koniglich,  Reale,  Imperiale,  etc.,  except  where 
these  adjectives  form  the  distinguishing  part  of  the  name,  and  disregard  the 
abbreviations  in  the  arrangement. 

The  words  Royal,  Imperial,  etc.  in  the  names  of  English  societies  are  not  to  be  abbre- 
viated nor  disregarded  in  arrangement. 

K.  Akademie  der  wissenschaften,  Berlin,  with  references  from 

Konigliche  akademie  der  wissenschaften,  Berlin. 

Berlin.  K.  Akademie  der  wissenschaften. 
K.  K.  Geographische  gesellschaft  in  Wien,  with  references  from 

Kaiserlich  konigliche  geographische  gesellschaft  in  Wien. 

Vienna.  K.  K.  (jcographische  gesellschaft. 
I.  R.  Accademia  di  scienze,  lettere  ed  arti  degli  agiati  in  Rovereto,  with  references 
from 

Imperiale  regia  accademia  di  scienze,  lettere  ed  arti  degli  agiati  in  Rovereto. 

I.  Regia  accademia  di  sc-ienze,  lettere  ed  arti  degli  agiati  in  Rovereto. 

Rovereto.    1.  R.  Accademia  di  scienze,  lettere  ed  arti  degli  agiati. 
Royal  society  of  Edinburgh,  with  reference  from 

Edinburgh.     Royal  society. 
Imperial  institute  of  the  United  Kingdom,  the  colonies,  and  India,  London,  with 
reference  from 

London.  Imperial  institute  of  the  United  Kingdom,  the  colonies,  and  India. 


24  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

79  Affiliated  societies.  Enter  local  branches  of  affiliated  societies  under  the 
name  of  the  general  organization  when  this  forms  part  of  the  name  of  the  local 
society.  On  the  other  hand,  local  branches  having  individual  names  which  do 
not  include  the  name  of  the  general  organization  are  to  be  entered  as  independent 
bodies  according  to  the  regular  rule  for  societies  (72)  In  the  latter  case,  make  a 
reference  from  the  name  of  the  general  organization. 

Archaeological  institute  of  America.  Washington  society,  with  references  from 
Archaooloj^ical  sorietN'  of  Washington;  Wasliington  society  of  the  Archaeologi- 
cal institute  of  America. 

Daughters  of  the  American  revolution.     Massachusetts.     Col.  Timothy  Bigelow 
chapter,  Worcester, 
but 

Nonmibega  women's  club,  Charlestown,  Mass.  {not  General  federation  of  wo- 
men's clubs.      Norumbega  women's  club,  Charlestown,  Mass.) 

80  Religious  denominations,  orders.  Enter  the  official  publications  of  a 
religious  denomination  or  order,  i.  e.  confessions  of  faith,  creeds,  catechisms, 
liturgies,  breviaries,  missals,  hours,  offices,  prayer-books,  etc.  under  the  name 
of  the  denomination  or  order.  (Eclectic,  195.  Cutter,  59.  cf.  also  rule  105, 
Conventions,  conferences) 

Church  of  England.     Book  of  common  prayer. 

Roman  Catholic  church.     Liturgy  and  ritual.     Breviary. 

81  Political  parties.  Enter  official  publications  (platforms,  proceedings, 
manifestoes,  campaign  books,  etc.)  of  political  parties  under  the  name  of  the 
party.  (Eclectic,  195.  Cutter,  59.   cf.  also  rule  105,  Conventions,  conferences) 

Democratic  party.  National  convention.  Chicago,  1884.  Official  proceed- 
ings of  the  National  Democratic  convention  held  in  Chicago,  111.,  July  8th,  9th, 
loth  and  nth,  1884  ... 

Republican  party.  New  York  (State)  6th  congressional  district.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  Republican  and  Union  convention  for  the  Sixth  congressional  district, 
held  at  Blcecker  buildings,  Oct.  14,  1862  ... 

The  publications  of  the  Republican  and  Democratic  congressional  committees  are  to  be 
entered  under  the  names  of  these  committees,  not  under  the  parties. 

Republican  congressional  committee,  190 1- 1903. 

INSTITUTIONS    (ESTABLISHMENTS) 

Specification.  This  includes  colleges,  universities,  schools,  libraries,  mercan- 
tile libraries,  museums,  galleries,  observatories,  laboratories,  churches,  monas- 
teries, convents,  hospitals,  asylums,  prisons,  theaters,  chambers  of  commerce, 
botanical  and  zoological  gardens,  buildings,  etc. 

82  General  rule.  Enter  an  institution  under  the  name  of  the  place  in  which 
it  is  located. 

New  York  (City)  Metropolitan  musetim  of  art,  with  reference  from  Metropolitan 
museum  of  art.  New    York. 

Boston.     Public  library. 

London.     Chamber  of  commerce. 

Philadelphia.     Children's  hospital,  with  reference  from  Children's  hospital  of 
Philadelphia. 
Washington,  D.  C.    Freedmen's  hospital,  with  reference  from  Freedmen's  hospital, 
Washins^ton. 

Paris.  Mus^e  national  du  Louvre,  with  references  from  Mus6e  national  du  Lou- 
vre, Paris;  Louvre,  Musee  national  du,  Paris. 


CORPORATE    BODIES    AS    AUTHORS:     INSTITUTIONS  25 

Exceptions,  and  special  rules  for  particular  classes  of  institutions* 

83  Institutions  whose  names  begin  with  a  proper  noun  or  adjective.    Enter 

an  institution  whose  name  begins  with  a  proper  noun  or  adjective  \  under  the 

first  word  of  its  name,  and  refer  from  the  name  of  the  place  where  it  is  located. 

Harvard  university. 

Corcoran  art  gallery,  Washington. 

Enoch  Pratt  free  library,  Baltimore. 

John  Crerar  library,  Chicago. 

A.  K.  Smiley  public  library,  Redlands,  Col. 

Smithsonian  institution. 

Boston  athenaeum. 

Victoria  and  Albert  museum,  South  Kensington. 

Two  modifications  of  this  rule  have  been  suggested: 

1  To  extend  the  rule  to  include  all  institutions  whose  names  are  distinctive. 

2  To  limit  the  scope  of  the  rule  by  making  it  apply  only  to  institutions  of  the  British 
empire  and  the  United  States;  foreign  institutions  would  therefore  be  entered  under  the 
place  even  if  their  names  begin  with  a  proper  noun  or  adjective. 

84  Colleges  or  professional  schools  of  a  imiversity.  Enter  the  colleges  of  a 
British  university  and  the  professional  schools  which  form  an  integral  part  of  an 
American  university  under  the  name  of  the  university,  with  the  name  of  the  col- 
lege or  school  as  subheading.    Refer  from  the  name  of  the  college  or  school. 

Oxford.     University.     Balliol  college. 

Yale  university.     Sheffield  scientific  school. 

St.  Andrews  university.      University  college,  Dundee. 

Cornell  imiversity.    Sibley  college  of  mechanical  engineering  and  the  mechanic  arts. 

Professional  schools  whose  names  begin  with  a  proper  noun  or  adjective  may  be  entered 
under  their  own  names,  particularly  if  they  are  situated  at  a  distance  from  the  university 
of  which  they  form  a  part,  have  merely  a  nominal  connection  with  it,  or  for  other  reasons 
are  unlikely  to  be  looked  for  under  its  name.  Cases  in  point  are  some  of  the  American 
schools  which,  originally  independent,  have  later  affiliated  with  or  become  departments  of 
a  university. 

St.  Ignatius  college,  Chicago,  with  reference  from  St.  Louis  university. 
Massachusetts.     Agricultural  college,  Amherst,  with  reference  from  Boston  uni- 
versity.     College  of  agriculture. 

85  College  or  university  institutions.    Enter  college  and  university  libraries, 

museums,  laboratories,  observatories,  hospitals,  shops,  and  similar  institutions 

under  the  name  of  the  college  or  university. 

Berlin.     UniversitSt.     Physikalisches  institut. 

Paris.     Ecole  superieiu-e  des  mines.     Bibliotheque. 

Columbia  university.     Obsen<atory. 

Harvard  university.     Peahody  museum  of  .-1  merican  archaeology  and  ethnology. 

Chicago  imiversity.     Hull  physiological  laboratory. 

*  While  some  of  the  special  rules  which  follow  are  inconsistent  with  the  principle  laid  down 
in  rule  83,  it  has  nevertheless  seemed  best  to  enter  certain  classes  of  institutions  (r.g.  churches, 
monasteries,  observatories,  public  schools,  Carnegie  libraries,  etc.)  under  place,  in  conform- 
ity with  the  general  rule  (82)  even  though  their  names  begin  with  a  profXT  noun  or  adjective. 

Exceptions  to  both  82  and  83  are  recommended  in  certain  cases,  where  the  affiliation  of 
one  institution  with  another  is  of  such  a  nature  that  entry  under  the  general  institution  is 
clearly  to  be  preferred  either  to  entry  under  the  name  of  the  subordinate  institution  or  under 
the  place  where  it  is  located,    cf.  84,  85,  89b,  94,  95. 

t  Library  of  Congress  enters  a  foreign  institution  whose  name  begins  with  a  national  ad- 
jective under  the  name  of  the  place  where  it  is  located. 


26  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

86  Public  schools.  Enter  all  schools  supported  by  taxation  under  the  name 
of  the  place  and  refer  from  the  name  of  the  school. 

New  York  (City)  Morris  high  school,  with  reference  from  Morris  high  school, 

Nnv    York. 
Minneapolis.     Lincohi  school,  with  reference  from  Lincoln  school,  Minneapolis. 
Paris.     Lyc6e  Janson-de-Sailly,  with  references  from  Lyc6e  Janson-de-Sailly, 

Paris;  Janson-de-Sailly,  Lycee,  Paris. 
Leipzig.     Thomasschule,  with  reference  from  Thomasschule,  Leipzig. 
Edinburgh.     Sciennes  school,  with  reference  from  Sciennes  school,  Edinburgh. 

87  Private  schools. 

a)  Enter  American  and  British  private  schools  under  the  name  when  this 
begins  with  a  proper  noun  or  adjective,  otherwise  under  the  place. 

Balliol  school,   Utica,  N.    Y. 

Copeland  school,  Saratoga  Springs,  N.    Y. 

but 
Washington,  D.  C.     Cathedral  school,  with  reference  from  Cathedral  school, 

Washinglon. 

When  a  school  is  known  only  by  the  name  of  the  proprietor,  enter  under  his 

name. 

Chesborough,  A.  J.,  school. 

b)  Enter  foreign  private  schools  under  the  place  where  located,  with  reference 

from  the  name  of  the  school  or  the  proprietor. 

Christiania.    Nissens  skole,  with  reference  from  Nisscns  skole,  Christiania. 
Milan.     Istituto  privato  Robiati,  with  reference  from  Robiati,  .Ambrogio. 

88  Indian  schools  (U.  S.)*    Enter  Indian  schools  of  the  U.  S.  Indian  service 

and  denominational  and  private  schools  which  receive  government  support, 

under  the  name  of  the  place  where  located.  Refer  from  the  name  of  the  school. 

(For  information  and  lists  of  schools  cf.  reports  of  the  commissioner  of  Indian 

affairs) 

Carlisle,  Pa.     Indian  industrial  school. 
Hampton,  Va.     Normal  and  agricultural  institute. 
Pipestone,  Minn.     Indian  training  school. 
Phoenix,  Ariz.     United  States  industrial  school. 
Morris,  Minn.     Indian  school. 

Private  Indian  schools  not  a  part  of  the  U.  S.  Indian  service  and  not  receiving 
government  support  are  to  be  entered  according  to  the  general  rule  for  Private 
schools  (87) 

89  Private  collections. 

a)   Enter  catalogs,  lists,  etc.  of  private  collections  (libraries,  art  galleries, 

numismatic  cabinets,  stamp  collections,  etc.)  under  the  name  of  the  owner  of  the 

collection,  with  added  entry  under  the  name  of  the  author  (compiler)  of  the 

work,  and  under  place  when  known  also  by  the  latter. 

Walters,  William  Thompson.     Oriental  collection  of  W.  T.  Walters,  65  Mt. 
Vernon  place,  Baltimore. 

Brinley,  George.     Catalogue  of  the  American  library  of  the  late  George  Brin- 
ley.     (By  Dr.  James  Hammond  Trumbulli 

Added  entry:    Tnimbull,  James  Hammond. 


*  Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  15. 


CORPORATE    BODIES    AS    AUTHORS:     INSTITUTIONS  2J 

b)  When  a  private  collection  has  passed  into  the  possession  of  some  institu- 
tion, society,  or  other  body,  entry  for  all  subsequent  publications  is  to  be  made 
under  the  name  of  that  body,  with  references  from  the  name  of  the  collection  and 
the  original  collector.  Publications  issued  before  the  change  of  ownership  are 
to  have  added  entry  under  the  name  of  the  institution  or  other  body  into  whose 
possession  the  collection  has  passed. 

Boston.  Public  library.  Prince  collection,  with  references  from  Prince  collec- 
tion, Boston  public  library;  Prince,  Thomas. 

Victoria  and  Albert  museum,  South  Kensington.  Dyce  collection,  with  references 
from  Dyce  collection,  Victoria  and  Albert  museum;  Dyce,  Alexander. 

90  National  institutions.  National  institutions  (often  designated  as  Imperial 
Royal,  National,  and  the  like)  which  include  in  their  names  the  name  of  the 
country,  and  therefore  tend  to  become  better  known  by  the  name  of  the  country 
than  by  that  of  the  city  or  town  where  they  are  located,  are  to  be  entered  under 
the  name  of  the  country.  The  name  of  the  city  or  town  is  to  be  added  in  the 
heading.    In  doubtful  cases  enter  under  the  city  or  town. 

Peru.     Biblioteca  nacional,  Lima,  with  reference  from  Lima.     Biblioteca  nacion- 

al  del  Peru. 
Victoria,  Australia.     Public  library,  museimis  and  national  gallery,  Melbourne, 

with  reference  from  Melbourne.     Public  library,  museums  and  national  gallery 

of  Victoria. 
New  South  Wales.     Public  library,  Sydney,  with  reference  from  Sydney.     Public 

library  of  New  South  Wales. 

91  American  state  institutions.  Enter  American  state  institutions  (universi- 
ties, libraries,  etc.)  under  the  name  of  the  state. 

Indiana  university. 

California.    University,  with  reference  from  University  of  California. 
Massachusetts.  State  library,  with  reference  from  State  library  of  Massachusetts. 
Illinois.     Asylum  for  feeble-minded  children,  Lincoln. 

There  are  certain  institutions  which,  although  not  strictly  ofhcial.  ;'.  c.  maintained  and 
controlled  by  the  state,  are,  on  account  of  their  names,  most  frequently  looked  for  under 
the  name  of  the  state.    These  may  best  he  entered  according  to  the  above  rule. 

Pennsylvania.     University,  with  reference  from  University  of  Pennsylvania. 

92  Agricultiural  experiment  stations  (U.  S.)*  Enter  agricultural  e.xperiment 
stations  of  the  United  States  under  the  name  of  the  state  or  territory  in  which 
they  are  organized.  Include  in  the  heading  the  name  of  the  place  where  the 
station  is  located.  Refer  from  the  university  or  college  of  which  the  station  may 
form  a  department,  from  the  name  of  the  station,  if  it  is  at  all  distinctive,  and 
from  the  name  of  the  place  where  it  is  located. 

New  York  (State)  Agricultural  experiment  station,  Geneva,  with  reference  from 
Ciencva,  N.  Y.     Agricultural  ex|x^riment  station. 

New  York  (State)  Agricultural  experiment  station,  Ithaca,  with  references  from 
Cornell  university.  .Agricultural  experiment  station;  Ithaca,  N.  ^'.  Agricul- 
tural experiment  station. 

Porto  Rico.  Agricultural  experiment  station,  Mayaguez,  with  reference  from 
Mayaguez,  Porto  Rico.     Agricultural  experiment  station. 

*  Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  21. 


28  "  ENTRY   AND   HEADING 

93  Universities,  galleries,  etc.  called  Imperial,  Royal,  etc.  Enter  universi- 
ties, galleries,  etc.  called  Imp>erial,  Royal,  National,  and  the  like,  under  the  name 
of  the  place  where  located.  The  adjective  denoting  royal  privilege,  etc.  is  to  be 
abbreviated  and  disregarded  in  arrangement,  except  in  English  names  {cf.  78, 
Learned  academies) 

Florence.     R.  Galleria  degli  Uffizi,  with  references  from  Reale  gallcria  degli 

I'ftizi,  Florence;  I'ffizi,  R.  (iallcria  degli,  Florence. 
London.     National  gallery,  with  reference  from  National  gallery,  London. 

The  full  corporate  names  of  the  universities  of  continental  Europe  are  little  used  even  in 
official  literature,  and  are  hence  practically  unknown.  Entry  is  therefore  made  under  the 
place  followed  by  the  simple  form  of  name  in  current  use. 

Christlanla.     Universitet,  with  reference  from  Kongelige  Frederiks  universitet, 

Christiania. 
Heidelberg.     Universitfit,  with  reference  from  Grossherzogliche  Ruprecht-Karls 

universitat  zu  Heidelberg. 
Kiev.     Universitet,  with  reference  from  Imperatorskii  universitet  Sviatago  V'ladi- 
mira. 

94  Observatories.  Enter  observatories  under  the  name  of  the  place  unless 
they  form  a  part  of  a  university,  college,  or  other  institution,  in  which  case  they 
are  to  be  treated  according  to  85. 

Greenwich,  Eng.  Royal  observatory,  with  reference  from  Royal  observatoryi 
Greenwich. 

Paris,  Observatoire,  with  references  from  Observatoire  de  Paris;  Observatoire 
royal  de  Paris;  Observatoire  imperial  de  Paris. 

Kalocsa,  Hungary.     Hajmald  observatorium,  with  reference  from  Haynald  ob- 
ser\'atorium,  Kalocsa,  Hungary, 
but 

Wisconsin.  University.  Washburn  observatory,  with  references  from  Washburn 
observatory,  Madison,  Wis.;  Madison,  Wis.    Washburn  observatory. 

Michigan.  University.  Detroit  observatory,  with  references  from  Detroit  obser- 
vatory', Ann  Arbor,  Mich.;  Ann  Arbor,  Mich.  Detroit  observatory;  Observa- 
tory of  the  University  of  Michigan. 

Carnegie  institution,  Washington.  Solar  observatory ,  Mt.  Wilson,  Cal.,  with  refer- 
ences from  Solar  observatory,  Mt.  Wilson,  Ca/.;  Wilson,  Mt.  ,Cal.  Solar  obser- 
vatory. 

A  specific  exception  may  be  permitted  in  favor  of  entry  under  the  name  in  case  the 
observatory  is  much  more  likely  to  be  looked  for  under  its  own  name  than  imder  that  of 
the  place  or  of  the  institution  of  which  it  forms  a  part. 

Lick  observatory,  with  reference  from  California.    University.     Lick  observatory- 
Allegheny  observatory,  with  reference  from  Allegheny,  Pa.    Western  university  of 
PennsyKania.     Allegheny  observatory. 

95  Botanical  and  zoological  gardens.  Enter  botanical  and  zoological  gar- 
dens under  the  name  of  the  place  where  located,  with  the  following  exceptions: 

1  When  distinctly  a  part  of  some  imiversity  or  school  enter  under  the  name 
of  the  university  or  school. 

2  When  owned  or  controlled  by  a  society  and  constantly  referred  to  by  its 
name,  enter  under  the  society. 

3  When  the  property  of  an  individual,  enter  under  his  name. 

Botanical  and  zoological  gardens  whose  names  are  preceded  by  the  titular 
designations  Imperial,  Royal,  National,  etc.  are  to  be  entered  according  to  this 
rule,  even  when  supported  wholly  or  in  part  by  public  fimds. 
General  rule  — 

Cincinnati.     Zoological  garden. 
Brussels.     Jardin  botanique. 
Kew.     Royal  gardens. 


CORPORATE    BODIES    AS    AUTHORS:     INSTITUTIONS  29 

Exception  i  — 

Cambridge.     University.     Botanic  garden. 

Miinden.     K.  Preussische  forstakademie.     Botanischer  garUn. 

Exception  2  — 

Royal  society  of  Tasmania,  Ilobart.     Gardens. 
Zoological  society  of  Philadelphia.     Garden. 
Zoological  society  of  London.     Gardens. 

Exception  3  — 

Aksakov  botanic  garden. 

96  Chiirches.    Enter  all  churches  under  the  name  of  the  place. 

London.  St.  Paul's  cathedral,  with  reference  from  St.  Paul's  cathedral,  London. 
Paris.   Notre-Dame,  with  reference  from  Notre-Dame  de  Paris. 
Boston.   Trinity  church,  with  reference  from  Trinity  church,  Boston. 

97  Monasteries,  abbeys,  convents,  etc.* 

1  Enter  monasteries,  abbeys,  convents,  priories,  etc.  which  are  located  in  a 
city  or  town,  under  the  name  of  the  place,  and  refer  from  the  name  of  the  institu- 
tion. 

Angers,  France.    Saint-Aubin  {Benedictine  abbey) 

Kerity,  France.    Beauport  {Premonstratensian  monastery) 

Vienna.    U[nsere]  Liiebej  Firauj  zu  den  Schotten  {Benedictine  abbey) 

2  When  a  village  or  town  has  grown  up  around  a  monastic  institution  and 

bears  the  same  name,  the  entry  is  to  take  the  following  form: 

Fulda,  Ger.  {Benedictine  monastery) 
Einsiedeln,  Switzerland  {Benedictine  monastery) 
St.  Gall,  Switzerland  {Benedictine  monastery) 
Gorze,  Alsace-Lorraine  {Benedictine  abbey) 
Clairmarais,  France  { Cistercian  abbey) 

As  distinct  from  — 
Fulda,  Ger.  {City) 
Einsiedeln,  Switzerland  {City) 
St.  Gall,  Switzerland  {Canton) 
St.  Gall,  Switzerland  {City) 
etc.,  etc. 

3  A  monastery  or  other  monastic  institution  not  located  in  a  city,  town,  or 

village  is  to  be  entered  under  its  own  name. 

Grande-Chartreuse  {Monastery) 
Monte  Cassino  {Benedictine  monastery) 

4  Enter  British  abbeys,  priories,  etc.  as  follows: 

Bury  St.  Edmunds  {Abbey) 
Ely  monastery. 
Tintem  abbey. 

98  National  banks.  Enter  national  banks  designated  merely  by  number 
under  the  name  of  the  place. 

Philadelphia.    First  national  bank. 

Enter  other  banking  institutions  under  firm,  association,  or  corporate  name. 

{cf.  109,  Firms) 

Bank  of  England. 
Suffolk  bank,  Boston. 

*  Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  14. 


30  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

99  Carnegie  and  similar  public  libraries.  Enter  Carnegie,  Passmore- 
Edwards,  and  similar  public  libraries  under  the  name  of  the  place,  and  refer  from 
the  name  of  the  library. 

Pittsburg.     Carnegie  library. 

The  reason  for  this  exception  to  an  exception  (f/.  83)  is  that  the  Carnegie  and  to  a  less 
extent  the  Passmore-Edwards  and  similar  libraries,  because  of  their  number  as  well  as  the 
nature  of  their  grants  and  endowTnents,  tend  to  become  much  belter  known,  at  least  outside 
of  their  own  immediate  neighborhood,  by  the  name  of  the  city  in  which  they  are  located, 
than  by  their  own  names.  Where  only  the  building  is  a  private  donation,  the  library  being 
otherwise  endowed  and  supported  by  public  taxation,  the  presumption  is  particularly 
strong  in  favor  of  entry  under  the  place. 

MISCELLANEOUS    BODIES   OR   ORGANIZATIONS    NOT   PROVIDED 
FOR   IN    RULES    58-99 

Specification.  This  includes  conferences,  congresses,  exhibitions,  and  other 
occasional  meetings,  firms  and  other  business  concerns,  committees  and  classes 
of  citizens  not  belonging  to  any  body  or  organization,  ecclesiastical  councils, 
foundations  and  endowments,  expeditions,  etc. 

100  Diplomatic  congresses.    Enter  diplomatic  congresses  under  the  name  of 

the  place  of  meeting,  with  reference  from  any  name  by  which  they  are  popularly 

known. 

Rastatt,  Congress  of,  1 797-1 799. 

Vienna,  Congress  of,  1814-1815. 

Verona,  Congress  of,  1822. 

Paris,  Congress  of,  1857. 

Berlin,  Congress  of,  1878. 

The  Hague.     International  peace  conference,  1899. 

Algeciras.     International  conference  on  Moroccan  affairs,  1906. 

loi  International  meetings.  Enter  international  meetings,  conferences,  and 
congresses,  of  private  persons,  under  their  English  names  provided  their  publica- 
tions have  appeared  in  English  or  that  language  is  specified  as  one  of  the  olhcial 
languages  of  the  conference.  In  other  cases  enter  under  the  name  in  the  language 
in  which  most  of  the  pubhcations  have  appeared,  or  when  this  cannot  be  ascer- 
tained, under  the  name  by  which  the  conference  is  best  known. 

International  congress  of  Orientalists,  with  references  from  Orientalists,  Inter- 
national congress  of;  Congres  international  des  orientalistes;  Internationaler 
orientalisten  congress,  etc.,  etc. 

102  Exhibitions,  etc.  Enter  general  exhibitions,  fairs,  bazaars,  etc.  under  the 
name  of  the  place  where  they  are  held,  and  refer  from  the  official  title  and  any 
other  names  by  which  the  exhibition  is  generally  known. 

Philadelphia.     Centennial  exhibition,  1876. 

New  Orleans.    World's  industrial  and  cotton  centennial  exhibition,  1884-1885. 

Chicago.     World  s  Columbian  exposition,  1893. 

Buffalo.     Pan-American  exposition,  1901. 

London.     Franco-British  exhibition,  1908. 

This  rule  applies  to  the  official  publications  of  an  exhibition.  Catalogs  or  descriptions 
of  exhibits  and  other  material  published  by  commissions  from  the  contributing  countries, 
business  firms,  or  other  contributors,  are  to  be  entered  under  the  bodies  or  persons  issuing 
them. 

U.  S.  Board  of  management  of  government  exhibit,  Tennessee  centennial  exposi- 
tion, 1897.  ...  Report  on  the  United  States  government  exhibit  at  the  Tennessee 
centennial  exposition,  Nashville,  1897. 


CORPORATE    BODIES    AS    AUTHORS:     MISCELLANEOUS  31 

103  Exhibitions  held  by  societies  or  other  bodies.  Exhibitions,  fairs,  bazaars, 
etc.j  held  by  or  under  the  auspices  of  some  society  or  institution  or  in  connection 
with  an  international  or  other  congress,  especially  when  they  are  numbered  and 
occur  at  more  or  less  regular  intervals  in  different  places,  are  to  be  entered  under 
tne  name  of  the  body  or  congress,  with  reference  from  the  name  of  the  place,  and 
irom  the  name  of  the  exhibition  when  this  is  at  all  distinctive. 

Grolier  club,  New   York.     Catalogue  of  an  exhibition  of  French  engravings  of 
the  eighteenth  century  ...  exhibited  at  the  Grolier  club  ...  mdccccv. 

Franklin  institute,  Philadelphia.     Report  of   the  ...  exhibition  of  American 
manufactures,  held  in  the  city  of  Philadelphia  ...  by  the  Franklin  institute  ... 

California  state  agricultural  society.     Annual  fair.     3d,  San  Jose,   1856. 
Official  report  ... 

(With  reference  from  San  Jose,  Cal.    California  state  agricultural  society's 
third  annual  fair,  1856) 

California   state  agriculttiral   society.      Annual  fair.     4th,   Stockton,    1857. 
Official  report  ... 

(With    reference    from    Stockton,    Cal.      California    state   agricultural 
society's  fourth  annual  fair,  1857) 

104  Ecclesiastical  councils.  Enter  ecclesiastical  councils  of  the  Catholic 
church,  both  general  and  special,  under  the  name  of  the  place  of  meeting.  Treat 
in  like  manner  councils,  conferences,  and  synods  of  other  religious  bodies,  pro- 
vided the  official  representation  is  not  limited  to  one  denomination  or  sect.  In 
the  latter  case,  enter  according  to  rule  105. 

Nicaea,  Council  of,  325. 
Ephesus,  Council  of,  481. 
Trent,  Council  of,  1 545-1 563. 
Dort,  Synod  of,  161 8- 161 9. 

Enter  Lateran  councils,  Vatican  council,  under  Lateran,  Vatican,  not  under  Rome. 

105  Conventions,  conferences. 

1  Enter   conventions,    conferences,    and   assemblies   of   societies,    political 

parties,  religious  denominations,  etc.  under  the  names  of  these  bodies,    (c/.  also 

80,  Religious  denominations,  orders,  and  81,  Political  parties) 

International  co-operative  alliance.    2d  congress,  Paris,  1896. 
Presbyterian  church  in  the  U.  S.  A.     General  assembly. 

2  Enter  conventions  and  conferences  of  bodies  which  have  no  existence  be- 
yond the  convention  under  the  name  of  the  convention.  If  no  name  can  be 
found,  enter  under  the  place  of  meeting  and  supply  a  name  descriptive  of  the 
character  of  the  convention. 

International  congress  of  arts  and  science,  St.  Louis,  1904. 

but 
Syracuse,  N.  Y.    Convention  of  mechanics  and  others,  1850. 
Boston.    Woman's  rights  meeting,  1859. 

{cf.  69,  Constitutional  conventions) 

106  Committees  and  meetings  of  citizens.     Enter  reports  of  meetings  or 

committees  of  citizens  not  belonging  to  any  named  body  or  class  and  having  no 

definite  name,  under  the  name  of  the  place  with  subheading  Citizens.    Make 

reference  or  added  entry  under  the  name  of  the  chairman  or  first  signer. 

New  York  (City)    Citizens.    Proceedings  at  the  mass  meeting  of  citizens  in 
the  Cooper  institute,  New  York  ...  March  24,  1874,  on  national  finances  ... 


32  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

107  Classes  of  citizens.     Knter  anonymous  publications  of  any  class  of 

citizens  (not  organized)  under  the  name  of  the  place  with  the  name  of  the  class 

as  subheading. 

Baltimore.    Merchants. 
Washington,  D.  C.     Bench  and  bar. 

108  Boards,  trustees,  etc.    Enter  bodies  whose  legal  names  begin  with  such 

words  as  Board,  Corporation,  Trustees,  under  the  names  of  the  institutions  or 

bodies  over  which  they  exercise  supervision. 

Smithsonian  institution.     Board  of  regents. 
Harvard  imiversity.     Board  of  overseers. 
British  museum.     Trustees. 

109  Firms.*  Enter  firms  under  surnames  rather  than  forenames,  giving  fore- 
names or  initials  according  to  the  usage  of  the  firm. 

Ward,  Montgomery,  &  co.,  with  reference  from  Montgomery  Ward  &  co. 
Appleton,  D.,  &  co.,  not  Appleton,  Daniel,  &  co. 

In  dealing  with  a  large  number  of  entries,  where  slight  changes  in  the  name 
are  frequent,  the  following  form  of  heading  may  prove  serviceable: 

Scribner,  ^rm,  publishers.  New   York. 
(1847.     Baker  and  Scribner) 
The  date  in  the  second  line  is  the  date  of  publication  of  the  book  cataloged. 

1 10  Foundations,  endowments,  funds.    Enter  foundations  and  endowments, 

funds,  etc.  under  their  names. 

Carnegie  institution,  Washington, 
Egypt  exploration  fund. 
Nobelstiftelsen,  Stockholm. 
Carlsbergfondet,  Copenhagen. 
Teyler's  stichting,  Haarlem. 

Endowments  and  special  funds  of  institutions  (universities,  colleges,  etc.)  are  usually  to 
be  entered  under  the  institution,  with  a  reference  from  the  name  of  the  fund. 

Michigan.    University.    Harris  memorial  trust,  with  reference  from  Harris  memo- 
rial trust. 
Smithsonian  institution.     Hodgkins  fund,  with  reference  from  Hodgkins  fund, 

111  Exploring  expeditions. 

a)  Enter  under  their  authors  or  compilers  accounts  or  publications  of  results 
of  exploring  expeditions,  when  the  work  is  clearly  the  production  of  a  single 
person  or  of  two  or  more  persons  working  in  conjunction. 

Wilkes,  Charles.  Narrative  of  the  United  States  exploring  expedition  during 
the  years  1838-1842.    By  Charles  Wilkes. 

Grenard,  Femand.  Mission  Dutrcuil  dc  Rhins  dans  la  haute  Asie.  Le  Tibet; 
le  pays  et  les  habitants,  par  F.  Cirenard  ... 

(Dutreuil  de  Rhins  directed  the  expedition,  but  died  while  it  was  in  progress) 

Hooker,  Sir  William  Jackson.  The  botany  of  Capt.  Becchcy's  voyage;  com- 
prising an  account  of  the  plants  collected  by  Messrs.  Lay  and  Collie,  and  other 
officers  of  the  exjwdition  ...  performed  in  H.  M.  S.  Blossom,  under  the  command 
of  Capt.  F.  W.  Beechey.     By  Sir  W.  J.  Hooker  and  G.  A.  Walker  Arnott  ... 

b)  Enter  accounts  and  publications  of  results  of  exploring  expeditions,  when 
consisting  of  contributions  by  several  persons,  under  one  of  the  headings  named 
below.    In  choice  of  heading  be  governed  by  the  way  in  which  the  expedition  is 

•  cf.  60,  note. 


TITLE    ENTRY  33 

generally  designated,  or  by  the  prominence  given  on  the  title-page  to  any  one  of 
the  suggested  headings.  In  cases  of  doubt  the  order  given  below  is  to  be  the 
order  of  preference. 

1  The  official  name  of  the  expedition.    The  date  of  the  expedition  is  to  be 

added  in  the  heading. 

Expedition  antarctique  beige,  1897- 1899.  Resultats  du  voyage  du  S.  Y.  Bel- 
gica  en  1897-99  sous  le  commandement  de  A.  de  Gerlache  de  Gomery;  rapjxjrts 
scientifiques. 

2  The  society,  institution,  government  department,  or  individual  person  who 

assumes  the  responsibility  of  the  expedition  and  the  publication  of  the  results. 

Gesellschaft  fiir  erdkunde  zu  Berlin.  Grdnland-expedition  dor  Gesellschaft 
fiir  erdkunde  zu  Berlin,  1891-1893.     Unter  icitung  von  Erich  von  Drygalski. 

Albert  I,  prince  of  Monaco.  Resultats  des  campagnes  scientifiques  accomplies 
sur  son  yacht  par  le  prince  Albert  I"  prince  de  Monaco.  Publics  sous  sa  direc- 
tion avec  le  concours  de  M.  le  baron  Jules  de  Guerne. 

3  The  commander  of  the  expedition,  especially  when  he  edits  the  results. 

Beechey,  Frederic  William.  The  zoology  of  Captain  Beechey's  voyage;  comp. 
from  the  collections  and  notes  made  by  Capt.  Beechey,  the  officers  and  naturalist 
of  the  expedition  ...  performed  in  H.  M.  S.  Blossom  under  command  of  Capt.  F. 
W.  Beechey,  1825-28,  by  eight  (persons) 

4  The  name  of  the  vessel  or  of  the  vessels  if  not  more  than  two  participate.* 

The  date  of  the  expedition  is  to  be  added  in  the  heading. 

Adventure  a7id  Beagle,  //.  M.  SS.  (1826- 1836)  Narrative  of  the  surveying 
voyages  of  His  Mcijesty's  ships  Adventure  and  Beagle  between  the  years  1826 
and  1836  ... 

5  The  editor  of  the  results. 

Adams,  Arthur,  ed.  The  zoology  of  the  voyage  of  H.  M.  S.  Samarang  under 
command  of  Sir  Edw.  Belcher,  1843-6  [by  four  persons! 

6  The  first  word  of  the  title. 

Exploration  scientifique  de  I'Algerie  pendant  les  annees  1840,  1841,  1842  ... 
In  all  cases  refer  freely  from  government  departments,  names  of  vessels,  com- 
manders, societies,  editors,  etc.  (c/.  note  under  169) 
(Eclectic,  153-161) 

d)  TITLE  ENTRY 

112  Anonymous.  Enter  anonymous  works  under  the  name  of  the  author 
when  known,  otherwise  under  the  first  word  of  the  title  not  an  article.  Make 
added  entries  for  titles  of  all  anonymous  works  whose  authors  are  known;  when 
the  work  relates  to  a  particular  person  or  place  make  added  entry  also  under 
this  name.f  {cf.  also  22:2) 

[Wright,  Mrs.  Mabel  (Osgood)  1    The  garden  of  a  commuter's  wife,  recorded 

by  the  gardener  ... 

(Amim,  Mary  Annette  (Beauchamp)  grafin  voni  Elizabeth  and  her  German 
garden  ... 

The  Ordeal  of  Elizabeth. 

The  Creed  of  Christ. 

*  Library  of  Congress  enters  under  first-named  vessel  with  added  entry  under  the  other, 
t  In  a  dictionary  catalog  this  is  usually  the  subjc"ct  entr>'. 


34  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

113  Anonymous  —  Change  of  title  in  successive  volumes.  When  the  title  of 
an  anonymous  work  in  several  volumes  changes  in  the  later  volumes,  enter  under 
the  first  title  unless  a  majority  of  the  volumes  are  issued  under  the  later  title  and 
the  work  for  this  or  some  other  reason  is  decidedly  better  known  by  this  title.  In 
either  case  refer  from  the  title  not  chosen. 

114  Anonymous  —  By  the  author  of  ...  When  an  anonymous  work  of  undis- 
covered authorship  bears  on  its  title-page  such  a  phrase  as  "by  the  author  of," 
enter  it  under  its  title  with  an  added  entry  under  the  title  quoted,  followed  by 
the  words  "Author  of."  If  different  titles  are  thus  used  by  an  author  at  various 
times,  make  the  added  entry  under  the  title  most  frequently  referred  to,  or,  in 
case  of  doubt,  under  one  of  his  best  known  or  earlier  works.  Refer  from  the  title 
of  each  work  to  the  title  thus  chosen,  using  the  form:  For  other  works  by  this 
author  see  ... 

A  Doffed  coronet:     a  true  story,  by  the  author  of  "The  Martyrdom  of  an 
empress"  ... 

Added  cntrj-:   Martyrdom  of  an  empress,  Author  of. 

A  Dofifed  coronet  ... 

For  other  works  by  this  author  see  Martyrdom  of  an  empress,  Author  of. 

115  Anonjmious  —  Initials,  etc.    Enter  under  title  books  in  which  initials, 

asterisks,  or  other  typographical  devices,  not  identified,  are  used  in  place  of  the 

author's  name.    Make  added  entry  or  reference  under  the  initials  (both  first  and 

last  letters)  asterisks,  etc. 

The  Young  travellers  in  South  America:  or,  A  popular  introduction  to  the 
history  and  resources  of  that  interesting  and  important  region.    By  G.  A.  .  . 
Added  entries:     i.  A.,  G.    2.  G.  A. 

Hungary  and  its  revolutions  from  the  earliest  period  to  the  nineteenth  century. 
With  a  memoir  of  Louis  Kossuth.     By  K.  O.  S. 
Added  entries:     i.  S.,  E.  O.    2.  E.  O.  S. 

Precis  historique  sur  la  revolution  des  provinces  unies  de  I'Amcrique  du  Sud  ... 
Par.  A.  F  *  *  *.,  ex-commissaire  des  guerres,  chevalier  de  la  Legion  d'honncur. 
Added  entries:    i.F***.,  A.    2.  A.  F.*  *  *. 

116  Anonymous  —  Dif event  spelling.  If  the  first  word  of  a  title  entry  or 
reference  may  be  spelled  in  more  than  one  way,  follow  the  spelling  of  the  title- 
page  and  refer  from  other  forms. 

Where  different  spellings  have  been  used  in  successive  editions,  follow  the 

title-page  in  each  case  and  make  added  entry  under  the  original  form. 

For  treatment  of  epics,  national  folk  talcs,  and  ihc  like  see  120. 

An  Inquiry  into  the  causes  of  the  miscarriage  of  the  Scots  colony  at  Darien  ... 
{In  A  Collection  of  state  tracts.     London,  1707.^  32^^  '^^.    v.  3,  p.  520-565) 

First  published  (Glasgow,  1 700,  as  '  \n  Enquiry  into  the  causes  letcl" 
Added  entry:    Enquiry  into  the  causes  ... 

(British)  Library  association  rule:  When  the  first  word  of  the  title  of  an  anony- 
mous work  is  spelled  in  more  than  one  way,  choose  one  form  of  spelling  and  refer  from 
the  others. 

Inquiry.     .\n  Knquiry  into  the  nature  and  origin  of  literary  property. 
Kncjuiry  see  ln(juiry. 

Where  different  spellings  have  been  used  in  successive  editions,  enter  under  the  earliest 
form  and  refer  from  the  others.  In  the  case  of  obsolete  or  archaic  forms  of  spelling,  enter 
under  the   motiern  form  and  refer  from  variants. 


TITLE    ENTRY  35 

117  Anonymous  —  Related  works.     When  the  title  of  an  anonymous  work 

begins  with  a  word  indicating  numerical  sequence,  or  defining  its  relation  to 

another  work,  make  added  entry  or  reference  under  the  title  of  the  principal 

work,  thus  collecting  related  material  under  that  title. 

A  Second  letter  to  a  late  noble  commander  of  the  British  forces  in  Germany  ... 
By  the  author  of  the  first  letter. 

"The  writer  ...  lis]  supi)osed  to  be  Owen  Ruffhead."  —  European  maga- 
zine, V.  14,  p.  168. 

Added  entries:  I.  Rufifhead,  Owen,  supposed  author.  2.  Letter  to  a  late 
noble  commander. 

118  Anonymous  —  Translations.  Enter  a  translation  of  an  anonymous  work 
under  the  first  word  of  the  translated  title  and  make  added  entry  under  the 
original  title. 

For  variations  from  this  practice  in  the  case  of  epics,  national  folk  tales,  etc.  see  1 20. 

Near  to  happiness  (A  c6te  du  bonheur)    Tr.  from  the  French  by  Frank  H. 
Potter. 

Added  entries:  i.  A  c6te  du  bonheur.  2.  Potter,  Frank  Hunter,  tr. 

(British)  Library  association  rule:  Enter  a  translation  of  an  anonymous  work 
under  the  heading  adopted  for  the  original  work  and  make  added  entr>'  under  the  first 
word  of  the  translated  title. 

119  Bible  and  similar  sacred  books.  Enter  the  Bible  or  any  part  of  it  (in- 
cluding the  Apocrypha)  in  any  language,  under  the  word  "  Bible."  Treat  in  like 
manner  the  Talmud,  Koran,  and  similar  sacred  books,  using  the  English  name 
unless  the  vernacular  is  decidedly  better  known.  Make  added  entries  under  the 
names  of  the  editors  and  translators,  and  refer  from  titles  of  individual  parts  or 
books,  especially  when  they  have  been  published  separately. 

Scheme  of  arrangement  under  Bible : 

1  Bible.     Polyglot. 

2      By  languages,  arranged  alphabetically. 

3      Selections,  by  languages,  arranged  alphabetically. 

4      Old  Testament.     Polyglot. 

5      Old  Testament,  by  languages,  arranged  alphabetically. 

6      Old  Testament.  Genesis,  Exodtis,  etc.,  in  order  of  the  authorized  ver- 
sion, each  book  subarrangcd  like  2. 

7      Old  Testament.     yl/>ofry/)/i(z,  arranged  as  above  (6) 

8      Old  Testament.  Apocryphal  books  {{or  .\\mk't\Y)\\i\  :\ni\Vsc\ii\ii[)\^rap\ia. 

not  inchulcd  in  the  authorizt-d  version)  arranged  alphabet icall\-. 

9      Ne^v  Testament,  arranged  as  above  (4-6) 

10      New  Testament.    Apocryphal  books,  arranged  ali)habeticall\-. 

Further  subdivisions  may  be  used,  e.  g.,  Selections  under  single  books  or  groups  of 
books,  Paraphrases  under  Psalms,  and  Harmonies  under  Gospels. 

Other  examples : 
Koran. 
Vedas. 
Vedas.     Atharvaveda. 

120  Epics,  national  folk  tales,  etc.    Enter  epics,  national  folk  talcs,  and  the 

like  under  the  English  name  by  which  they  are  known  and  refer  from  the 

vernacular.    If,  however,  the  vernacular  name  is  decidedly  better  known,  enter 

under  that  and  refer  from  the  English  form.     Make  added  entries  under  the 

names  of  editors  and  translators,    (c/.  also  Cutter,  125-126) 

Nibelimgenlied.     The  fall  of  the  Xibelungs;  done  into  English  by  Margaret 
Armour;  iilustratcd  and  decorated  by  W.  B.  Macdougall. 

Added  entries:  i.  Armour,  Margaret,  tr.  2.  Macdougall,  W.  B.,  illus. 


36  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

Other  examples : 

Edda  Saemundar. 

Egils  saga  Skallagrimssonar. 

Nj&la. 

Arabian  nights. 

Giolla  an  fhiugha. 

Rejmard  the  fox. 

Chanson  de  Roland. 

121  Periodicals.  Enter  a  periodical  under  the  first  word  of  the  title  not  an 
article  and  give  in  the  form  of  notes  (a)  the  frequency  of  publication;  (b)  impor- 
tant variations  of  title;  (c)  the  successive  editors;  (d)  important  changes  of  place 
of  publication  and  of  publisher;  (e)  indexes,  supplements,  etc.,  unless  entered 
separately  (cf.  15,  Indexes)  Make  added  entries  for  editors  and  for  compilers  of 
indexes,  and  analytical  entries  for  monograph  supplements. 

If  a  periodical  has  changed  its  name,  enter  it  under  the  latest  form.*  Make 
brief  entries  under  the  earlier  names,  referring  to  those  which  immediately  pre- 
cede and  follow  in  a  note  introduced  by  the  phrase  "preceded  by"  or  "con- 
tinued as."  If  the  change  in  name  is  slight,  a  reference  will  suffice  in  place  of  the 
brief  entry. 

The  Imperial  and  Asiatic  quarterly  review  and  Oriental  and  colonial  record  ... 
V.  i-io,  Jan.  1886-Oct.  1890;  2d  ser.,  v.  i-io,  Jan.  1891-Oct.  1895;  ^d  ser., 
V.  I-  Jan.  1896-  London,  T.  F.  Unwin  letc,  1886-91  j;  Woking, 

The  Oriental  university  institute  (1891- 

v.  illus.,  plates,  ports.,  maps,  facims.,  tables.     25  *=">. 
Title  varies:  1886-90,  The  Asiatic  quarterly  review.     1891-  The 

Imperial  and  Asiatic  quarterly  review  and  Oriental  and  colonial  record. 
(July  1891-Apr.  1892,  t.-p.  reads:  The  Asiatic  quarterly  review.  Cover  and 
caption  title:  The  Imperial  and  Asiatic  quarterly  review  and  Oriental  and 
colonial  record) 

Editor:  1886-90,  Demetrius  Boulger. 

.Added  entries:     I.  Boulger,  Demetrius  Charles  de  Kavanagh,  ed.  2. 
2.     Woking,  Eng.   Oriental  university  institute,  pub. 

The  Asiatic  quarterly  review.     VA.  by  Demetrius  Boulger.    v.  i-io;  Jan.  1886- 
Oct.  1890.    London,  T.  F.  Unwin,  letc,  1886-901 
ID  V.    maps.    25  •■™. 

Continued  as  the  Imperial  and  Asiatic  quarterly  rc\iew. 
Added  entry:    Boulger,  Demetrius  Charles  de  Kavanagh,  ed. 

A  regular  periodical  issued  by  a  society  or  an  institution  is  ordinarily  to  be 
entered  under  its  title,  especially  if  this  is  distinctive  in  character.  When,  how- 
ever, the  successive  parts  appear  at  long  intervals  —  annually,  biennially,  etc. 
—  or  when  the  publication  contains  only  the  regular  proceedings,  transactions, 
and  annual  reports  of  the  society,  it  is  to  be  entered  under  the  name  of  the  latter, 
with  added  entry  or  reference  under  the  title  if  it  is  distinctive.  In  doubtful 
cases  entry  under  the  society  is  to  be  preferred. 

The  Audubon  magazine,  published  in  the  interests  of  the  Audubon  society  for  the 
protection  of  birds,    v.  1-2;  Feb.  1887-Jan.  1889. 
No  more  published. 

Added  entry:    Audubon  society  for  the  protection  of  birds. 
Ethnological  society  of  London.    Transactions  of  the  Ethnological  society  of 
London,    v.  1-7.     New  scries. 

The  Transactions  replaced  the  Journal  of  the  Society  during  the  interval 
between  the  first  and  second  scries  of  that  publication. 

(BRmsH)  Library  association  rule  calls  for  entry  of  periodicals  which  have  changed 
their  names  under  the  earliest  form  with  brief  entries  under  later  forms. 

*  In  certain  cases,  especially  where  a  continuation  adopts  new  volume  numbcrine:  without 
reference  to  that  of  the  preceding  series,  the  earlier  periodical  need  not  be  included  in  the 
entry  under  the  latest  form  of  name,  but  full  entry  may  be  made  under  each  title,  with  notes 
referring  to  earlier  and  later  entries. 


TITLE    ENTRY  37 

Library  of  Congress  practice 

Main  entry  is  under  latest  form  of  name. 

For  current  periodicals  the  following  order  is  prescribed: 

1  Short  title,  followed  by  a  blank  line;  imprint;  collation;  frequency  of  publication. 
(When  the  first  volume  is  in  the  library,  the  volume  number  and  date  of  first  issue 
are  included  in  the  title) 

2  Beginning  a  new  card,  a  note  giving  the  various  titles  under  which  the  periodical 
has  been  published. 

3  Note  giving  successive  editors, 

4  Note  giving  changes  in  place  of  publication  and  publishers,  when  important. 

(2,  3,  and  4  may  be  combined  if  changes  of  title,  editor,  and  imprint  occur  simulta- 
neously) 

Sufficient  space  is  left  to  permit  insertion  of  information  regarding  earlier  or 
later  volumes  which  may  come  to  hand. 

5  Specification  on  a  new  card  of  the  volumes  in  the  library,  introduced  by  the 
phrase  "Library  has:" 

6  A  separate  concise  entry  for  each  series  which  bears  a  different  title,  with  notes 
"preceded  by,"  "continued  as,"  or  a  direct  reference  to  the  current  name. 

7  Added  entries  under  the  names  of  editors,  subjects,  etc. 

When  a  periodical  ceases  to  be  published,  the  information  contained  on  the  card  specified 
under  5  is  transferred  to  the  blank  line  provided  for  that  purpose  on  card  i,  the  former 
card  being  canceled.  On  the  other  hand,  if  a  periodical  continues  under  a  new  name,  the 
cards  containing  bibliographical  notes  and  statement  of  what  is  in  the  library  are  placed 
after  the  new  title.  Under  the  old  title  there  remains  the  usual  brief  entry,  referring  for 
continuation  to  the  new  name.  In  current  titles  the  last  date  and  the  statement  of  the 
number  of  volumes  are  written  in  pencil, 

122  Extracts  from  periodicals.  Enter  a  collection  of  extracts  from  a  periodi- 
cal under  the  name  of  the  periodical  provided  this  appears  in  the  title  of  the 
collection.  Make  added  entries  under  the  title  of  the  collection  and  the  name  of 
the  collector. 

If  the  periodical  is  not  named  in  the  title  enter  under  the  collector  (under  title 
if  anonymous)  Give  the  name  of  the  periodical  in  a  note,  and  make  a  reference 
or  an  added  entry  under  it. 

The  work  of  a  single  author  republished  from  a  periodical  (a  separate)  will  not  ordinarily 
require  a  reference  or  an  added  entry  under  the  name  of  the  periodical. 

Blackwood's  Edinburgh  magazine.    Tales  from  "Blackwood." 
Added  entry:    Tales  from  "Blackwood." 

Life.     Auto  fun ;  pictures  and  comments  from  ' '  Life  "... 
Added  entry:    Auto  fun. 

Maga  stories. 

Reprinted  from  Putnam's  monthly. 
Added  entr>':    FHitnam's  monthly. 

My  aunt's  match  making,  and  other  stories  by  popular  authors. 
Running  title:    Stories  from  Cassell's. 
Added  entry:    Cassell's  magazine. 

123  Almanacs,  year-books,  etc.  Enter  under  their  titles  almanacs,  year- 
books, and  similar  serial  publications. 

The  Statesman's  year-book;  statistical  and  historical  annual  of  the  states  of  the 
world...    Revised  after  official  returns.    (1st]-  annual  publication;  1864- 

Editors:     1864-82,  P'rcderick  Martin.  —  1883-94,  J.  S.  Keltic.  —  1895- 
J.  S.  Keltic,  I.  P.  A.  Ren  wick. 

Added  entries:  i.  Martin,  Frederick,  ed.     2.  Keltic,  John  Scott,  rd.    3. 
Renwick,  Isaac  Parker  Anderson,  <■</. 


38  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

124  Newspapers.  Enter  newspapers  under  the  first  word  of  the  title  not  an 
article.  In  the  case  of  newspapers  which  appear  in  several  editions  (Sunday, 
morning,  evening,  etc.)  under  slightly  varying  titles,  enter  each  edition  inde- 
pendently, but  make  added  entry  or  reference  under  the  main  title,  and  likewise 
under  the  name  of  the  city  unless  this  appears  as  the  first  word  of  the  title. 

The  Terre  Haute  express. 

The  Union,  with  reference  from  Indianapolis.    The  Union. 

The  Westminster  jjazette,  with  reference  from  London.    Westminster  eazette. 

The  Morning  times,  with  added  entr>-:  The  Times,  Washington,  and  reference  from 

WashinKton.  D.  C.  Morning  times. 
The  Evening  times,  with  added  entry:  The  Times,  Washington,  and  reference  from 

Washington,  D.  C.  Evening  times. 

125  Directories.  Enter  a  directory  published  periodically  under  the  first 
word  of  the  title  not  an  article,  a  serial  number,  or  the  initial*  of  a  compiler  or 
publisher. 

Enter  a  non-periodical  directory  under  the  name  of  the  compiler  if  mentioned 
on  the  title-page.  If  no  compiler  is  mentioned  enter  under  the  first  word  of  the 
title. 

Make  added  entries  or  references  as  follows:  (a)  Under  the  name  of  the 
place  t  in  the  case  of  a  town,  city,  county,  or  state  directory;  (b)  under  the  com- 
piler of  a  directory  published  periodically,  and  under  the  publisher  pro\nded  his 
name  appears  as  a  part  of  the  title. 

(Cutter,  115) 

The  United  States  statistical  directory,  or  Merchants'  and  travellers'  guide;  with 
a  wholesale  business  directory  of  New-York.    By  Loomis,  White  &  co. 
Added  entr\-:    Loomis,  White  &  co. 

Dorfler,  Ignaz.     Botaniker-adressbuch.     Sammlung  von  namen  und  adrcssen 
der  lebenden  botaniker  aller  lander,  dcr  botanischen  garten  und  der  die  botanik 
pflegenden  institute,  gesellschaften  und  periodischen  publicationen.     Hrsg.  von 
I.  Dortler  ... 
Crockford's  clerical  directory  ...  being  a  statistical  book  of  reference  for  facts 

relating  to  the  clergy  and  the  church  ... 
The  Clergy  list  ...  containing  complete  lists  of  the  clergy  in  England,  Wales,  Scot- 
land, Ireland,  and  the  colonies  ...  &'c.  &c. 

126  Collections.  Enter  composite  works  and  collections  of  independent 
works,  essays,  etc.  by  various  authors  under  the  compiler  or  editor,  individual 
or  corporate.  If  the  work  of  the  editor  or  editing  body  seems  to  be  but  slight 
and  their  names  do  not  appear  prominently  in  the  publications,  or  if  there  are 
frequent  changes  of  editor,  enter  under  the  title.     (Cutter,  98-108.    Eclectic, 

87-91) 

Dole,  Nathan  Haskell,  comp.  The  Latin  poets;  an  anthology,  by  Nathan 
Haskell  Dole  ... 

Longfellow,  Henry  Wadsworth,  ed.  The  f)oets  and  poetry  of  Europe.  With 
intnxluctions  and  biographical  notices.     By  Henr>'  Wadsworth  Longfellow  ... 

Gifts  of  genius:  a  miscellany  of  prose  and  poetry,  by  American  authors. 
Introduction  by  S.  ().  (Samuel  Osgood) 
Added  entr>-:    Osgood,  Samuel. 

*  If  the  title  of  a  directory  begins  with  the  initial  of  the  name  of  a  publisher  or  compiler, 
enter  under  the  surname  of  the  publisher  or  compiler,  e.g.,  R.  L.  Polk  &  co.'s  city  of  Superior 
director\-,  under  Polk,  R.  L.,  &  co. 

t  In  dictionary-  catalogs  which  make  a  subject  entry  under  the  name  of  the  place,  sub- 
heading Directories,  this  added  entr>'  or  reference  is  of  course  omitted. 


TITLE    ENTRY  39 

The  Empire  and  the  century;  a  series  of  essays  on  imperial  problems  and  possibili- 
ties, by  various  writers.  With  an  intrfxluction  by  Charles  Sydney  Goldman  ... 
and  a  poem  by  Rudyard  Kipling,  entitled  'The  heritage'  ... 

Added  entries:  i.  Goldman,  Charles  Sydney,  ed.  2.  Kipling,  Rudyard. 

1  Enter  under  their  titles  such  compilations  as  monumenta.  scriptorcs,  anecdota.  col- 
lections of  inscriptions,  etc.,  unless  they  are  generally  referred  to  under  the  name  of  the 
editor. 

Monumenta  Habsburgica.  Sammlung  von  actcnstiicken  und  briefen  zur  ge- 
schichte  des  haiises  Habsburg  in  dem  zeitraume  von  1473  bis  1576.  Hrsg.  von 
der  Histor.  commission  der  Kaiserl.  akademie  dor  wissenschaften  zu  Wien  ... 

Added  entry:  K.  Akademie  der  wissenschaften,    Vienna.     Historische 
commission. 

2  Enter  fcst.schriften  and  similar  collections  published  by  a  society  or  an  institution  in 
honor  of  a  person  or  to  celebrate  an  anniversiiry  under  the  society  or  institution,  with 
added  entry  under  the  title.  When  not  published  by  a  .society  or  an  institution,  enter 
under  the  title.  In  cither  case  make  added  entries  under  the  editor  and  the  person  in 
who?e  honor  the  collection  is  published. 

Freiburg  i.  B.  Universitat.  Festschrift  der  .Albrecht-Ludwigs-universitat  in 
Freiburg  zum  funfzigjahrigen  regierungs-jubilaum  Seiner  Koniglichen  Hoheit  des 
grossherzogs  Friedrich. 

Added  entry:  Friedrich  I,  grand-duke  of  Baden. 
Germania  mannerchor,  Baltimore.     Festschrift  zum  goldenen  jubilaum  10. 
oktober  1906  des  Germania  mannerchor  von  Haltimore,  Md.,  gegriindet  am  10. 
oktober  1856.   Im  auftrage  des  ausschusses  fiir  vereinsgeschichte  zusammen- 
gestellt  von  Carl  Lacgclcr. 

Added  entry:  Laegeler,  Carl. 
An  English  miscellany;  presented  to  Dr.  Furnivall  in  honor  of  his  seventy- 
fifth  birthdav. 

Ed.  by  W.  P.  Ker,  A.  S.  Napier,  and  W.  W.  Skeat. 

Added  entries:  i.  Ker,  William  Paton,  ed.  2.  Napier,  Arthur  Sampson, 
joint  ed.  3.  Skeat,  Walter  William,  joint  ed.  4.  Furnivall,  Frederick  James. 
Festschrift  zum  siebzigsten  geburtstage  Moritz  Cantors  ...  Hrsg.  von  M.  Curtze 
und  S.  Giinther  ... 

Added  entries:  I.  Curtze,  Maximilian,  ed.  2.  Giinther,  Siegmxmd,  jo/«/ 
ed.  3.  Cantor,  Moritz  Benedikt. 

3  Two  or  more  writings  by  different  authors  published  together  but  having  no  collec- 
tive title  are  to  be  entered  under  the  one  named  first  on  the  title-page,  even  though  the 
name  of  the  editor  may  also  be  given. 

Carlyle,  Thomas.  Carlyle's  Essay  on  liurns,  with  The  cotter's  Saturday  night, 
and  other  poems  from  Burns;  ed.  with  notes  and  an  introduction  by  Willard  C. 
Gore. 

Added  entries:    I.  Bums,  Robert.    2.  Gore,  Willard  Clark,  r<f. 

127  Cyclopedias.  Enter  cyclopedias  and  dictionaries  under  the  name  of  the 
editor,  unless  decidedly  better  known  by  their  titles.  In  doubtful  cases  enter 
under  editor.  Make  added  entry  under  the  publisher  when  the  work  is  apt  to  be 
referred  to  by  his  name. 

Larousse,  Pierre.     Grand  dictionnairc  univcrsel  du  xi.x*"  siecle  ...  p;ir  M. 
Pierre  Larousse  ... 
The  Century  cyclopedia  of  names;  a  pronouncing  and  etymological  dictionary-  of 

names  in  geography,  biography,  m>thology,  history,  ethnology,  art,  archaxil- 

ogy,  fiction,  etc.,  etc.,  etc.;  ed.  i)y  Benjamin  E.  Smith  ... 
Added  entry:  Smith,  Benjamin  Eli,  ed. 

128  Series  entry.*  Enter  a  series  under  its  title,  unless  it  is  universally 
known  under  the  name  of  the  editor  or  publisher,  and  inake  added  entry  or  refcr- 

*  An  independent  entry-  should  be  made  for  each  separate  work  in  a  series  under  its  own 
heading,  the  name  of  the  series  being  given  in  parenthesis  after  the  collation,     (r/.  166) 


40  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

ence  under  the  editor.  Include  in  the  series  entry  a  list  of  the  works  in  the 
library  which  belong  to  the  series,  giving  author's  name,  brief  title,  and  date  of 
publication  of  each  item. 

Arrange  the  contents  numerically  if  the  publishers  have  assigned  numbers, 
otherwise  alphabetically  by  the  names  of  the  authors,  or,  where  such  arrange- 
ment would  be  more  useful,  as  in  the  case  of  biography,  by  subjects. 

International  scientific  series. 

V.  I.  Tyndall,  John.     Forms  of  water.     1872. 

V.  2.  Bagchot,  Walter.     Physics  and  politics.     1890. 

V.  3.  Smith,  Edward.     Foods.     1873. 

Story  of  the  Empire;  cd.  by  Howard  Angus  Kennedy. 
Besant,  Sir  Walter.     Rise  of  the  Empire.     11897) 
Kennedy,  Arnold.     Story  of  the  West  Indies.     11899] 
Kingsley,  Mary  H.     Story  of  W^est  Africa.     [1 8991 
McCarthy,  Justin.     Ireland  and  her  stor>'.     1903. 
Added  entry:    Kennedy,  Howard  Angus,  ed. 

English  men  of  letters;  ed.  by  John  Morley. 
Bacon.     Bv  R.  W.  Church.     1886. 
Goldsmith."    Bv  William  Black.     1887. 
Lamb.     By  Alfred  Ainger.     1888. 
Added  entry:    Morley,  John,  ed. 

Historic  towns;  ed.  by  Edward  A.  Freeman  &  Rev.  William  Hunt. 
Boston.     By  H.  C.  Lodge.     1891. 
Bristol.     By  William  Hunt.     1887. 
Carlisle.     By  Mandell  Creighton.     1889. 
Exeter.     By  E.  A.  Freeman.     1887. 

Added  entries:    I.  Freeman,  Edward  Augustus,  ed.  2.  Hunt,  William,  ed. 

Where  printed  cards  are  used  a  simple  but  less  compact  method  is  to  insert  a  card  for 
each  separate  work  under  the  series  title,  the  latter  being  written  at  the  head  and  the 
cards  properly  arranged.  A  written  card  giving  the  title  and  name  of  the  editor  should 
precede. 

129  Inscriptions.  A  single  inscription  of  unknown  authorship  is  to  be 
entered  under  the  editor  unless  uniformly  referred  to  by  a  distinctive  name,  in 
which  case  it  may  be  entered  under  that  name,  with  reference  from  the  place 
where  it  was  found.  Treat  collections  of  inscriptions  according  to  126,  note  i. 
(Instruktionen,  12) 

Comparetti,   Domenico   F*ietro   Antonio,   ed.      Iscrizione  arcaica   del   Foro 
Romano,  edita  cd  illustrata  da  Domenico  Comparetti. 
but 
Rosetta  stone  inscription.     Dcr  dcmotische  teil  der  dreisprachigen  in.schrift 
von  Rosette:  iibers.  unti  crklart  von  dr.  J.J.  Hess. 
Added  entrj-:    Hess,  Johann  Jakob,  ed. 

e)  MISCELLANEOUS  RULES 

130  Geographic  headings.  Give  geographic  names  used  as  entry  words  in 
the  English  form.  When  both  an  English  and  a  vernacular  form  are  used  in 
English  books,  the  vernacular  is  to  be  preferred. 

Munich,  not  Miinchen. 
Florence,  not  Firenzc. 
Austria,  not  Oesterreich. 
Saxe-Meiningen,  not  Sachscn-Meiningen. 

hut 
Dauphin^,  not  Dauphiny. 
Mainz,  not  Mayence. 
Leipzig,  not  Lcipsic. 


MISCELLANEOUS    RULES  4I 

In  deciding  between  diflferent  forms  of  place  names  refer  to  standard  gazetteers 
such  as  Lippincott's  new  gazetteer;  Longman's  gazetteer;  Century  cyclopedia  of 
names;  Ritters  geographisch-statistisches  lexikon;  Vivien  de  Saint- Martin's 
Nouveau  dictionnaire  de  geographic  universelle. 

For  place  names  in  the  United  States  American  libraries  will  follow  the  form  prescribed 
by  the  U.  S.  Geographic  board  provided  it  has  made  a  decision  (see  its  latest  report). 

Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rile  7 

The  following  classes  of  geographic  divisions  arc  enterecl  under  the  name  of  the  place, 
followed  by  the  name  of  the  country  (not  by  Uie  name  of  the  province  or  snuiller  division) : 

1  City,  town,  borough,  commune,  etc. 

2  County,  "arrondissement,"  etc. 

3  State,  province,  "departement,"  etc. 

Examples : 

Alexandria,  Egypt. 

Alexandria,  Scot. 

Alpes,  Hautes-,  France  (Dept.) 

Alpes-Maritimes,  France  (Dept.) 

Cork,  Ire.  ( City) 

Cork,  Ire.  ( County) 

Cumberland,  Eng. 

Exceptions: 

I     City,  town,  borough,  commune,  etc. 

a)  Enter  largest  or  best  known  city  of  its  name  without  further  designation,  e.  g. 

Boston. 

Chicago. 

London. 

New  York  ( City) 

Paris. 

Quebec  (City) 

In  doubtful  cases  add  name  of  country. 

b)  Enter  towns,  etc.  in  the  United  States  as  follows: 

Bayonne,  A^  /.,  not  Bayonne,   U.  S.  (N.  J.) 

2   County,  " arrotidissement,"  etc. 

Enter  counties  in  the  United  States  as  follows: 

Washington  Co.,  O. 
Washington  Co.,  Pa. 
Washington  Co.,    Vt. 

Two  or  more  places  of  the  same  name  in  a  given  country  or  state  are  to  lie  distinguished 
by  the  addition,  in  parenthesis,  of  the  name  of  the  province,  "departement,"  county,  etc., 
of  the  place  in  question,  e.  g. 

Athies,  France  (Aisne) 

Athics,  France  (Pas-de-  Calais) 

Athies,  France  (Somme) 

Bradford,  Eng.  (Devonshire) 

Bradford,  Eng.  (Northumberland:  Berwick-upon-Tweed  div.) 

Bradford,  Eng.  (  Northumberland :  Wansbeck  div.) 

Bradford,  Eng.  (  Yorkshire) 

Templemore,  Ire.  ( Co.  Mayo) 

Templemore,  Ire.  ( Co.  Tipperary) 

Victoria,  Can.  (Alberta) 

Victoria,  Can.  (B.  C.) 

Washington,  0.  (Fayette  Co.) 

VV'ashington,  O.  (Guernsey  Co.) 


42  ENTRY    AND    HEADING 

131  Modified  vowels.  In  headings  write  the  modified  vowels  a,  6,  u,  in  what- 
ever language  they  may  occur  (German,  Swedish,  Hungarian,  etc.)  according 
to  the  usage  of  the  author,  but  arrange  as  ae,  oe,  ue.  (Cutter,  299.  Eclectic, 
324-329) 

132  Civil  actions.    Enter  reports  of  civil  actions  under  the  party  to  the  suit 

who  is  named  lirst  on  the  title-page,  adding  the  name  of  the  second  party,  in 

the  following  form:   Doe,  John,  vs.  Roe,  Richard.*    Make  added  entry  under 

the  second  party,  and  also  under  the  reporter,  provided  his  name  appears  on 

the  title-page.    {cf.  2,  Joint  authors) 

Brooks,  William,  vs.  Byam,  Ezekiel.  The  case  of  William  Brooks  versus 
Kzekitl  Byam  and  others,  in  equity,  in  the  Circuit  court  of  the  United  States,  for 
the  First  circuit  —  district  of  Massachusetts.  Before  the  Honorable  Mr.  Justice 
Ston,',  the  Honorable  Judge  Sprague.  Simon  (ireenleaf,  esq.,  Charles  Sumner, 
esq.,  counsel  for  complainant.  Franklin  Dexter,  esq.,  Eben'r  Smith,  jr.,  esq., 
counsel  for  respondents. 

Bill,  answers,  depositions,  etc. 

Added  entry:    Byam,  Ezekiel. 

.\dded  entries  or  references  for  courts,  judges,  defendants  other  than  the  first,  etc.  are 
omitted  in  the  examples  under  132-135.  How  far  such  added  entries  are  to  be  made  will 
depend  largely  on  the  fullness  of  the  catalog  or  the  character  of  the  library, 

133  Crown,  state,  and  criminal  trials.  Enter  reports  of  crown,  state,  and 
criminal  proceedings  under  the  name  of  the  defendant.  When  the  trial  is  of 
several  individuals  enter  under  the  one  named  first  on  the  title-page. 

Paine,  Thomas.  The  trial  of  Thomas  Paine,  for  a  libel,  contained  in  the 
second  part  of  Rights  of  man,  before  Lord  Kenyon,  and  a  special  jury,  at  Guild- 
hall, December  18  ... 

O'Comiell,  Daniel,  defendant.  A  special  report  of  the  proceedings  in  the  ca.se 
of  the  Queen  against  Daniel  O'Connell  ...  John  O'Connell  ...  Thomas  Steele,  e.sq., 
Thomas  Matthew  Ray,  esq.,  Charles  Gavan  Dufify,  esq..  Rev.  Thomas  Tierney, 
Rev.  Peter  James  Tyrrell,  John  (iray  ...  and  Richard  Barrett,  esq.  in  the  Court  of 
Queen's  bench,  Ireland,  Michaelmas  term,  1843,  and  Hilary  term,  1844;  on  an 
indictment  for  conspiracy  and  misdemeanour.  Ed.  by  John  Flanedy,  e.sq. 
Added  entry:    Flanedy,  John,  ed. 

134  Admiralty  proceedings.    Enter  admiralty  proceedings  relating  to  vessels 

under  the  name  of  the  vessel. 

Savannah  (Privateer)  Trial  of  the  officers  and  crew  of  the  privateer  Savannah, 
on  the  charge  of  piracy,  in  the  United  States  Circuit  court  for  the  southern  dis- 
trict of  New  York.  Hon.  Judges  Nelson  and  Shipman,  presiding.  Reported  by 
A.  F.  Warburton  ... 

Added  entry:    Warburton,  Adolphus  Frederick,  reporter. 

135  Collected  reports  of  trials.    Enter  collected  reports  of  trials  under  the 

name  of  the  compiler;  if  published  anonymously,  enter  under  title,     (cf.  126, 

Collections) 

(Harris,  Carrie  Jenkinsi  "Mrs.  C.  \V.  Harris."    State  trials  of  Mar\',  queen 
of  Scots,  Sir  Walter  Raleigh,  and  Captain  William  Kidd.    Condenscnl  and  copied 
from  the  State  trials  of  Francis  Hargrave  ...  London,  1776,  and  of  T.  B.  Howell 
...  London,  1816,  with  explanatory  notes.     By  Charli-s  Kdward  Lloyd  [pseud.] 
.■\dde<l  entries:    I.  Hargrave,  Francis.    2.  Howell,  Thomas  Bayly. 

*  On  the  Library  of  Congress  printed  cards  only  the  first  piirty  to  the  suit  is  given  in  the 
heading. 


TITLES  43 

TITLES 

(c/.  also  Cutter,  221  —  256) 

136  Title.  The  title  is  usually  to  be  given  in  full,  including  the  author's 
name,  and  is  to  be  an  exact  transcript  of  the  title-page,  except  that  mottoes  and 
non-essential  matter  of  any  kind,  as  well  as  designation  of  series,*  may  be 
omitted,  the  omissions  being  indicated  by  three  dots  (.••)  The  punctuation  of  the 
title-page  is  generally  to  be  followed;  if  there  is  no  punctuation  it  is  to  be  supplied 
icf.  173) 

For  a  written  card  catalog  the  title  may  be  abridged. 

137  Titles  of  rare  books.    Give  the  title  or  colophon  of  books  of  exceptional 

rarity  or  curiosity  in  full,  rei)roducing,  as  far  as  possible,  punctuation,  capitaliza- 
tion, and  typographical  peculiarities.    (Cutter,  351) 

138  Misprints  or  eiTors  of  spelling.  Indicate  misprints  or  obvious  errors  of 
spelling  by  [!]  or  [sic^ 

The  beginning  end  [!]  end  of  drinking. 
In  a  manuscript  catalog  use  three  dots  (...)  under  the  word  misspelled. 

139  Additions  to  title.  Additional  matter  may  be  supplied  (within  brackets) 
in  the  title  when  this  is  ambiguous  or  requires  explanation.  Such  additions 
should  be  brief  and  in  the  language  of  the  title;  if  they  require  much  space,  they 
are  to  be  given  in  the  form  of  a  note.    {cf.  168,  Notes) 

Burroughs,  John.    Bird  and  bough;  (poems]  by  John  Burroughs  ... 

Worrell,  John.     A  diamond  in  the  rough;  embracing  anecdote,  biography, 
romance  and  history,  by  Captain  John  Worrell  ... 

Contains  brief  sketches  of  (General  Sam  Houston,  the  Texan  war  of  inde- 
pendence. New  Harmony,  Ind.,  Evangeline  and  the  Acadians  in  the  United 
States,  civil  war  reminiscences,  etc. 

140  Language  of  the  book.  State  in  a  note,  or  within  brackets  in  the  title,  the 
language  or  languages  in  which  a  book  is  written,  when  the  fact  is  not  apparent 
from  the  title. 

141  Transliteration  and  translation  of  title.  Titles  in  characters  other  than 
roman  or  gothic  may  be  transliterated.  A  brief  translation  may  also  be  added  of 
all  titles  not  in  the  classic,  Romance  or  Teutonic  languages. 

142  Titles  of  works  (other  than  periodicals)  in  more  than  one  volume. 

Works  in  more  than  one  volume  (other  than  periodicals)  are,  as  a  rule,  to  be  cata- 
loged from  the  title-page  of  the  first  volume,  subsequent  changes  being  explained 
in  notes  or  shown  in  contents,     {cj.  113) 

143  Same  work  published  under  different  titles.  If  a  book  has  been  pub- 
lished under  two  or  more  titles,  make  full  entry  for  each  of  the  editions  in  the 
library'  and  give  in  a  note  under  each  entry  the  other  title  or  titles  under  which 
the  book  has  appeared.  If  the  library  has  but  one  of  the  editions,  make  full 
entry  under  this  title  and  refer  from  the  others.-    (Eclectic,  288-300) 

*  cj.  166,  Series  note. 


44  TITLES 

1  Meredith,  George.    Kmilia  in  England. 

Afterwards  issued  under  title:  Sandra  Belloni. 
Meredith,  George.     Sandra  Belloni. 

Previously  issued  under  title:  Emilia  in  England. 

2  Meredith,  George.     Emilia  in  England. 

Afterwards  issued  under  title:  Sandra  Belloni. 
Meredith,  George.     Sandra  Belloni. 

See  his  Emilia  in  England.    (The  same  work  published  under  a  different 
title) 

144  Books  with  several  title-pages.  If  a  book  has  several  title-pages,  select 
the  most  general,  and  give  the  others,  if  necessary,  in  a  note  or  as  contents. 

This  rule  applies  only  when  the  title-pages  come  under  the  same  heading.  If  the  several 
title-f)ages  require  separate  entry  (as  when  one  is  the  title  of  a  series,  the  other  that  of  a 
work  in  the  series)  each  title  will  be  used  under  its  own  heading. 

Of  an  engraved  and  a  printed  title-page  the  latter  is  usually  to  be  preferred, 
and  always  when  it  bears  a  later  date. 

Of  two  title-pages  equally  general  choose  the  first  when  one  follows  the  other, 
the  second  when  they  face  each  other. 

(Cutter,  156-158) 

145  Titles  and  title-pages  in  different  languages.  Of  titles  and  title-pages  in 
different  languages,  if  only  one  is  in  roman  characters,  use  that;  if  both  or  neither 
are  in  roman,  use  the  one  in  the  original  language.  Mention  in  a  note  the  un- 
used title. 

In  the  case  of  Greek  classics  with  the  title  in  Greek  and  also  in  Latin  on  the 
same  title-page,  give  both  titles. 

Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  20 

1  Tille-pagcs  and  text  in  two  or  more  languages. 

Of  title-pages  in  dilTerent  languages,  with  te.xt  likewise  in  more  than  one  language,  choose 
the  one  which  is  printed  in  roman  or  gothic  characters.  When  neither  title-page  is  printed 
in  roman  or  gothic,  or  when  both  are  in  one  or  the  other  of  these  types,  select  the  one  which 
is  in  the  original  language.  When  the  original  language  cannot  be  ascertained,  the  main 
title-page  is  to  be  chosen,  or,  when  that  cannot  be  determined,  the  first.  Mention  in  a  note 
the  other  title  or  titles  and  the  languages  of  the  text. 

The  added  title  is  to  be  quoted  when  it  contains  additional  information  of  importance. 

2  Title-pages  in  different  languages,  text  in  one  langiuige. 

When  there  are  two  title-pages  with  text  in  only  one  language,  the  title-page  which  agrees 
with  the  text  is  to  be  followed.  Exceptions  to  this  are  Greek,  Russian,  Oriental,  and 
occasionally  also  American  Indian  texts  with  title-pages  in  the  original  and  also  in  Latin, 
French,  English  or  some  other  language  which  employs  roman  or  gothic  characters.  Here 
the  title  in  roman  or  gothic  is  always  to  be  selected.  Mention  in  a  note  the  other  title  and 
the  language  of  the  text. 

3  Otte  title-page  with  titles  in  two  languages. 

VVTicn  the  title  is  printed  in  two  languages  on  the  same  title-page  (there  being  but  one) 
give  both  titles  with  the  customary  abbreviations  and  notes. 

Exception:  When  one  of  the  titles  is  in  a  language  which  employs  characters  other  than 
roman  or  gothic,  it  is  to  be  omitted,  only  the  title  which  is  in  roman  or  gothic  type  being 
then  given.  A  note  is  to  be  made  of  the  other  title  and  the  language  or  languages  of  the 
text. 

In  early  and  rare  books,  or  when  some  material  variation  exists  between  the  two  titles, 
both  are  to  be  given. 

When  there  are  more  than  two  titles,  give  the  first  two  which  are  printed  in  roman  or 
gothic  type.    If  one  of  the  succeeding  titles  is  in  English,  this  also  is  to  be  given. 

4  Arrangements  or  combinations  of  titles  and  title-pages  in  different  languages  not 
provided  for  in  rules  1-3  are  to  be  submitted  for  special  decision. 


IMPRINT  .  45 

146  Reprints  with  two  title-pages.    When  a  reprint  includes,  in  addition  to 

its  own  title-page,  a  reproduction  of  that  of  the  original,  follow  the  title-page  of 

the  reprint,  and  mention  the  other  in  a  note,  giving  place  and  date  of  publication 

and  quoting  the  title  if  it  differs  from  that  of  the  reprint. 

Flint,  James.     ...  Flint's  Letters  from  America,  1818-1820.    Cleveland,  1904. 
Reprint,  including  facsimile  of  t.-p.  of  original  edition,  Edinburgh,  1822. 

Macropedius,  Georgius.     ...  Rebelles  und  Alvta.  Ursg.  von  Johannes  Bolte 
...  Berlin,  1897. 

Reprint  of  the  original  edition  with  reproduction  of  t.-p.:  Comicarvm 
fabvlariim  Georgii  Macropedii  duae  ...  quar.  altera  Rebelles,  altera  Alvta 
inscribitur  ...     iBusciducis)  in  officina  Hatardi  (1535) 

147  Title-page  wanting.  When  the  title-page  is  lost,  supply  the  title  from 
some  bibliographical  source,  citing  the  authority  in  a  note.  If  the  title  cannot  be 
ascertained,  give  the  half-title,  running  title,  or  colophon,  and  state  in  a  note 
which  has  been  selected;  if  there  is  no  half-title,  running  title,  or  colophon,  sup- 
ply a  title  (within  brackets)  and  give  in  a  note  the  beginning  of  the  te.xt  and  a 
brief  description  of  contents. 

In  the  case  of  a  book  published  without  a  title-page,  give  the  half-title,  run- 
ning title,  caption  title,  or  colophon,  as  the  case  may  be,  stating  in  a  note  the 
form  in  which  the  title  occurs. 

148  Edition.  Consider  the  statement  specifying  the  edition  as  a  part  of  the 
title.  It  is  to  be  given  in  the  language  of  the  book  and  in  the  order  of  the  title- 
page,  except  that  customary  abbreviations  may  be  used.*    (Cutter,  254-256) 

Minor  differentiations  between  copies  of  the  same  edition,  e.  g.  8th  thousand,  may  be 
omitted. 

149  Different  editions  represented  in  the  same  set.  When  the  volumes  in  a 
set  are  of  different  editions,  specify  the  various  editions  in  a  note  or  in  contents, 
not  in  the  title. 

IMPRINT,  COLLATION,  SERIES  NOTE 

{cj.  also  p.  47-49,  51-54,  Library  of  Congress  supplementar>'  rules) 

150  Place  of  publication.  After  the  title  give  the  place  or  places  of  publica- 
tion in  the  language  of  the  title. 

151  Place  —  Form  of  name.  When  thought  desirable,  add  (in  brackets) 
modern  equivalents  and  familiar  forms  of  latinized  or  vernacular  names.  {See 
Deschamps,  Dictionnaire  de  geographic  ancienne  et  modcrne;  ]  Graesse,  Orbis 
latinus;  Stein,  Manuel  de  bibliographic  generale,  app.  i;  Chevalier,  Repertoire 
des  sources  historiques  du  moyen  kgc:    Topo-bibliographie) 

152  Publisher.  After  the  name  of  the  place  give  the  name  of  the  publisher  in 
the  language  of  the  title. 

C.  Scribner's  sons;  L.  Ilachette  et  c'*" ;  Jungc  »S:  sohn. 
In  a  written  card  catalog  the  place  and  publisher's  name  may  generally  be  abbreviated. 
Rost.,  Houghton;  N.  V.,  II.  S.  book  co.;  Chic,  McClurg. 


'  cf.  174,  Figures.  f  Supplement  to  Brunei's  "Manuel  du  libraire." 


46  IMPRINT 

153  Place  of  printing.  After  the  place  of  publication  and  publisher  the  place 
of  printing  and  printer  may  be  given,  if  different.  This  is  desirable  only  in  rare 
and  old  books,  or  when  of  special  significance  for  other  reasons. 

London,  N.  Triibner  iColombo,  S.  J.  A.  Skecn,  printer) 
Paris,  Dentu  iGuernsey,  Imprimeric  universellcj 

154  Privately  printed  books.  In  cataloging  privately  printed  books  add  the 
abbreviation  "priv.  print."  in  the  imprint  if  the  fact  is  not  evident  from  the 
title-page. 

Duff,  Edward  Gordon.  The  printers,  stationers  and  bookbinders  of  London 
and  Westminster  in  the  fifteenth  century.  A  series  of  four  lectures  delivered  at 
Cambridge  in  the  Lent  term,  mdcccic.  By  K.  Gordon  DufT  ...  [.-Mwrdeen, 
Aberdeen  university  press,  priv.  print.]  1899. 

155  Date.  Give  the  date  found  on  the  title-page,  in  arabic  figures  except  in 
cases  where  the  form  in  which  it  appears  is  characteristic  of  a  special  edition  or 
otherwise  worthy  of  note.  Dates  other  than  those  of  the  Christian  era  are  to  be 
given  as  found  on  the  title-page,  followed  by  the  date  of  the  Christian  era,  the 
latter  in  brackets  if  supplied.    (Cutter,  264-275.    cf.  also  rule  174,  Figures) 

I'an  in  dc  la  Republique  II7951;  an  xi  —  1803;  5665  —  1905;  A.  H.  1152  II74O]; 
Tan  de  la  V.-.L.-.5788  1 17881 

156  Date  wanting.  When  there  is  no  imprint  date  the  year  of  publication,  if 
it  can  be  ascertained,  is  to  be  given  in  brackets,  and  if  uncertain,  to  be  given 
appro.ximately. 

ii89-?j,  1189-1,  11892?! 

If  no  approximate  date  can  be  found,  give  the  century  in  which  the  book  was 
published,  e.g.   [18 — ] 

If  the  century  cannot  be  determined,  indicate  the  absence  of  a  date  by  the 
abbreviation  "n.d." 

In  the  case  of  books  frequently  reissued  without  date  or  printed  from  plates 
bearing  date  of  earlier  (first)  edition,  the  fact  of  reissue  is  to  be  indicated  by  a 
note  giving  date  of  first  publication  of  that  edition. 

Maupassant,  Guy  de.  ...  Gontes  du  jour  et  de  la  nuit  ...  Paris,  H.  Klam- 
marion  [n.  d.i 

First  edition  appeared  in  1885. 

157  Copyright  date.  When  there  is  no  date  on  the  title-page  of  a  copyrighted 
book,  and  the  date  of  publication  or  issue  cannot  be  ascertained,  give  in  the 
imprint  the  date  of  copyright,  preceded  by  a  superior  "c"  and  bracketed. 

New  York,  H.  Holt  &  co.  i''i894i 

If  the  date  of  the  copyright  entry  is  earlier  than  the  date  of  issue,  the  former 
need  be  given  only  in  exceptional  cases;  for  instance,  when  the  existence  and 
date  of  an  earlier  (first)  issue  or  edition  have  not  been  definitely  established,  or 
when  a  more  precise  date  cannot  be  given. 

When  the  title-page  is  dated,  write:  1902  1*^18991 

When  the  title-i>agc  is  not  dated,  but  bears  copyright  notice,  write:  119021  '"1878. 


IMPRINT  47 

Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  12 

The  imprint  is  to  be  given  in  the  following  order:  ist,  place;  2d,  publisher,  printer,  or 
bookseller;  3d,  date. 

Certain  works  such  as  incunabula  and  the  like  are  excepted,  when  for  special  reasons  the 
imprint  is  best  given  in  a  form  and  order  suited  to  the  peculiarities  of  the  case. 

The  actual  imprint,  if  ascertainable,  is  always  to  be  given,  whether  it  appears  on  the  title- 
page  or  not.  In  the  latter  case  it  is  to  be  added  in  brackets  after  the  imprint  as  found  on 
the  title-page. 

1  Books  piiblislied  in  the  United  States. —  WTien  more  than  two  places  and  publishers 
are  named  on  the  title-page,  give  the  first-named  place  and  publisher,  followed  by  one 
other,  the  choice  of  the  latter  being  determined  by  the  relative  importance  of  the  several 
places  and  publishers.  New  York  or  Boston  to  be  preferred. 

Examples : 

When  the  title-page  reads 

Published  by  J.  A.  Bancroft  &  co.,  Philadelphia,  J.  W.  Schermerhorn  &  cc, 
New  York,  C.  G.  Cooke,  Boston,  Hendricks  &  Potter,  St.  Louis,  Speakman 
&  Proctor,  Chicago,  1867. 
Give :  Philadelphia,  J.  A.  Bancroft  &  co. ;  New  York,  J.  W.  Schermerhorn  &  co.; 
[etc.,  etc.i  1867. 
But  if  the  title-page  reads 

Leach,  ShewcU  &  Sanborn,  Boston,  New  York,  Chicago,  1890. 
Give :  Boston,  New  York  [etc.i  Leach,  Shewell  &  Sanborn,  1890. 
Or  if  the  title-page  reads 

Buffalo,  Chicago,  New  York,  Charles  Wells  Moulton,  1890. 
Give:  Buffalo,  New  York  [etc.)  C.  W.  Moulton,  1890. 

2  Books  published  abroad. —  When  more  than  one  place  and  publisher  are  named  on 
the  title-page,  give  the  first,  followed  by  (etc.,  etc.]  unless  one  of  the  others,  usually  distin- 
guished by  position  or  type,  is  known  to  be  the  actual  place  of  publication.  In  that  case 
the  latter  is  to  be  given  first. 

When,  in  addition  to  the  foreign  places  named  on  the  title-page,  one  or  more  places  in  the 
United  States  are  given,  the  cataloger  shall  include  one  of  the  latter,  preferably  New  York. 

Examples  : 

When  the  title-page  reads 

Paris,  Goupil  &  c'** ;  London,  Simpkin,  Marshall,  Hamilton,  Kent  &  co.,  ltd., 

1898. 
Give:  Paris,  Goupil  &  c'^ ;  [etc.,  etc.]  1898. 
When  the  title-page  reads 

London,  David  Nutt,  Dulau  &  co.,  Sampson  Low  &  co.    Agencies  for  .'\merica: 
New  York,  E.  Steigcr  &  co..  The  International  co.,  Chicago,  Muhlluiuer  & 
Behrle,  Boston,  Charles  Schonhof.    Heidelberg,  Julius  Grogs,  1890. 
Give :  Heidelberg,  J.  Groos;  New  York,  E.  Stciger  &  co.;  [etc..  etc.)  1890. 
When  the  title-page  reads 

The  Socicle  universelle  lyriquc,  London,  Paris,  Berlin,  Philadelphia,  1899 
Give:  London,  Philadelphia  [etc.]    The  Societe  universelle  lyrique,  1899. 

3  Two  or  more  places  and  publishers. —  Indicate  the  omission  of  Ijoth  a  place  and  pub- 
lisher by  (etc.,  etc.]  immediately  preceding  date  and  separated  from  the  last-named  pub- 
lisher by  a  semicolon. 

Examples : 

When  the  title-page  reads 

Published  by  J.  A.  Bancroft  &  co.,  PhiUidelphia,  J.  W.  Schermerhorn  &  co.. 
New  York,  C.  G.  Cooke,  Boston,  Hendricks  &  Potter,  St.  Louis,  Speakman 
&  Proctor,  Chicago,  1867. 
Give :  Philadelphia,  J.  A.  Bancroft  &  co.;  New  York,  J.  W.  Schermerhorn  &  co.; 
[etc.,  etc.]  1867. 
See  also  illustrations  under  2,  Books  published  abroad. 

4  Two  or  more  places,  publisher  the  same:. —  Indicate  the  omission  of  a  place  from  the 
imprint  by  ictc]  after  the  last  place  given. 

Examples : 

When  the  title-page  reads 

Buffalo,  Chicago,  New  York,  Charles  Wells  Moulton,  1886. 
Give:  Buffalo,  New  York  [etc.]  C.  W.  Moulton,  1886. 


48  IMPRINT 

Or  if  the  title-page  reads 

The  Societe  universelle  lyrique,  London,  Paris,  Berlin,  Philadelphia,  1899. 
Give :  London,  Philadelphia  [etcj  The  Societe  universelle  lyrique,  1899. 

5  Otie  place  with  two  or  more  piiblisliers. —  Indicate  the  omission  of  a  publisher's  name 
by  (Ctci  after  the  last  name  given. 

Example  : 

When  the  title-p>age  reads 

London,  David  Nutt,  Dulau  &  co.,  Samjison  Low  &  co.,  1890. 
Give:  London,  D.  Nutt  letc.i  1890. 

6  Two  places  connected  by  and,  und,  et,  etc.,  or  by  a  dash  (-)  or  other  device,  with  pub- 
lisher's name  either  preceding  or  follounng. —  Give  imprint  in  the  usual  order  and  include  the 
conjimction: 

Leipzig  und  VVicn,  Bibliographisches  institut,  1900. 
Arnheim-Nijmcgen,  H.  &  M.  Cohen  118991 

7  Public  documents. —  In  state  and  city  publications,  especially  those  of  serial  character, 
when  there  are  frequent  changes  of  place  and  publisher  (or  printer)  omit  publisher.  Give 
the  name  of  the  first -mentioned  place,  followed  by  letc]  using  pencil  when  the  first  volume 
of  the  series  is  lacking. 

8  Imprints  without  publisher's  or  printer's  name. —  If  the  name  of  neither  publisher  nor 
printer  appears  on  the  title-page  but  the  printer's  name  is  given  on  the  verso  of  title-page,  at 
the  end  of  the  volume,  or  elsewhere  in  the  book,  this  information  is  to  be  supplied  in  brackets 
even  though  the  name  of  the  publisher  is  ascertainable.  Thus,  if  the  volume  has  only 
"Washington,  1882"  as  imprint,  but  on  the  verso  of  the  title-page  "Baltimore,  W.  K. 
Boyle,  printer,"  give 

Washington  [Baltimore,  W.  K.  Boyle,  printer]  1882. 

If,  on  the  contrary,  the  title-page  has  a  full  imprint,  as  "New  York,  The  Macmillan  com- 
pany, 1898."  and  on  the  verso  "New  era  printing  co.,  Lancaster,  Penna.."  no  notice  of  the 
latter  is  ordinarily  to  be  taken  in  cataloging.  When  bibliographically  impwrtant  or  other- 
wise of  interest,  the  printer's  name  should  be  added;  as, 

London,  N.  Triibner  (Colombo,  S.  J.  A.  Skeen,  printer) 

Paris,  Dentu  [Guernsey,  Imprimerie  universelle) 

Q  Addition  of  name  of  state  or  country  after  place  of  publication. —  When  the  place  of 
publication  is  not  well  known  or  is  one  of  several  cities  of  the  same  name,  the  name  of  the 
state  or  country  is  to  be  supplied  if  it  does  not  appear  in  the  imprint.    If  it  occurs  in  the 
imprint  it  is  to  be  given,  even  after  the  names  of  well-known  cities. 
Amherstberg  [Ont.];  Rome  [N.  V.j;  Rome  (Ga.) 

10  Dissertations. —  a)  Follow  title-page,  giving  place,  printer's  (respectively  publisher's) 
name  in  shortest  form,  and  date,  b)  When  place  and  date  (without  publisher  or  printer) 
are  followed  by  printer's  address,  i.  e.  by  another  place  with  printer's  name,  give  only  the 
first ;  e.  g. 

a)  Halle  a.  S.,  Druck  von  E.  Karras,  1898. 

Giessen,  Miinchow'sche  hof-  und  universitats-druckerei  (O.  Kindt)  1903. 

b)  Leipzig,  W.  Engelmann,  1899. 

not  Leipzig,  W.  Engelmann  (Hofbuchdruckerei  S.  Geibel  in  Altenburg]  1899. 
Leipzig,  1898. 

not  Leipzig,  1898.    Druck  von  C.  H.  Schulze  &  co.  in  Grafenhainichen. 

11  Fictitious  imprints. —  Give  imprint  as  found  on  title-pjage,  followed  by  actual  imprint 
in  brackets,  as  follows: 

Paris,  Impr.  Vincent,  1798  {i.e.  Bruxelles,  Mocns,  1883) 

Imaginary  imprints  are  to  be  treated  as  part  of  the  title  of  the  work  when  the  real  imprint 
can  be  ascertained,  the  latter  following  in  brackets  in  the  usual  position;  as, 

Morande,  Charles  Th^venot  de,  b,  1748.  Lc  gazeticr  cuirasse,  ou,  .-Xnecdotes 
scandaleuscs  dc  la  cour  dc  France.  Imprime  k  cent  lieues  de  la  Bastille.  iLon- 
dres)  1771. 


IMPRINT,    COLLATION  49 

12  Variations  in  imprint. —  If  the  place  or  publisher  varies  in  the  different  volumes  of 
a  set,  state  the  fact  in  a  note,  giving  the  variations  if  of  sufficient  importance. 

13  Privately  printed  books. —  Give  the  statement  that  a  book  is  privately  printed  as  it 
appears  on  the  title-page.  If  the  statement  does  not  appear  on  the  title-page,  it  is  to  be 
supplied  in  the  imprint  or  in  a  note. 

14  Language  of  imprint. —  The  imprint  is  to  be  given  as  found  on  the  title-page,  and 
is  neither  to  be  translated  nor  transliterated. 

DATE 

1  Undated  title-page. —  When  there  is  no  date  on  the  title-page,  but  the  preface  is  dated, 
give  the  date  of  the  latter  (preceded  by  "pref."  and  bracketed)  provided  the  actual  date  of 
publication  cannot  be  ascertained  from  other  sources.  When  it  is  possible  to  determine 
the  actual  date  of  issue  the  date  of  the  preface  need  be  given  (in  a  note)  only  when  there  is 
a  wide  discrepancy  between  it  and  the  ascertained  date  of  publication  supplied  in  the 
imprint. 

2  Copyright  date. —  a)  In  the  case  of  copyrighted  books,  when  there  is  no  date  on  the 
title-page  and  the  date  of  publication  cannot  be  determined,  give  in  the  imprint  the  date 
of  copyright,  preceded  by  a  superior  "c"  and  bracketed;  as, 

New  York,  H.  Holt  &  co.  ^18941 

b)  If  the  date  of  the  copyright  entry  is  earlier  than  the  date  of  issue,  the  former  need 
be  given  only  in  exceptional  cases,  for  instance  when  the  existence  and  date  of  an  earlier 
(first)  issue  or  edition  have  not  been  definitely  established,  or  when  a  more  precise  date 
cannot  be  given. 

Examples : 

When  the  title-page  is  dated,  write:   1902  ri899i 

When  the  title-page  is  not  dated,  but  bears  copyright  notice,  write:  11902)  '1878 

c)  When  there  is  no  date  on  the  title-page  and  the  date  of  copyright  printed  on  th^ 
verso  of  title-page  differs  from  that  furnished  by  the  records  of  the  Copyright  office,  give 
the  former  in  the  imprint  and  the  latter  in  a  note. 

3  Irregularly  dated  title-page. —  When  a  work  consists  of  many  volumes  with  different 
dates,  whether  of  the  same  or  of  different  editions,  give  in  the  imprint  the  inclusive  dates 
separated  by  a  dash  and  state  in  a  note  or  in  contents  the  dates  of  the  individual  volumes 
and  the  numbers  of  their  resf)ective  editions. 

Bancroft,  George,  1800-1891.     History  of  the  United  States  from  the  dis- 
covery of  the  American  continent.    Boston,  Little,  Brown  &  co.,  1838-74. 
10  V.      22^^""". 
Vol.  I,  15th  ed.,  1857;  v.  2,  4th  ed.,  1838;  v.  3,  3d  ed.,  1840;  v.  4-10,  1852-74. 

When  only  one  volume  (e.  g.  the  first  one)  is  irregularly  dated,  as  in  the  case  of  collected 
works  with  an  introductory  volume  issued  after  the  others,  the  date  may  be  given  in  the 
following  form : 

1876-79  [V.  I,  '79) 

When  there  are  only  two  volumes  in  a  work,  give  the  dates  in  the  order  of  the  volumes 
separated  by  a  comma  in  place  of  the  usual  dash.    Thus: 

Collignon,  Edouard  /.<-.  Remain  Charles  Edouard,  1831-         Cours  do  m6ca- 
nique  appliquee  aux  constructions  ...     Paris,  Dunod,  1885,  '80. 
2  V.     tables,  diagrs.     24H  ''"'• 
I.  ptie.,  3.  ed.;  2.  ptie.,  2.  ed.  rev.  et  augm. 

158  Collation.  Give  all  items  of  collation  in  English  and  in  the  following 
order:   ist,  volumes  or  pages;  2d,  illustrations;  3d,  size. 

159  Volumes,  pages.  Give  the  number  of  volumes,*  or  of  pages  if  there  is 
only  one  volume. 

*  If  a  contents  note  is  added  to  the  entry  for  a  work  in  several  volumes  the  paging  of  each 
volume  may  be  given  in  the  contents. 


5©  COLLATION 

i6o  Paging.  Indicate  the  number  of  pages  by  giving  the  last  number  of 
each  paging,  separating  the  numbers  by  a  comma.  The  addition  of  unpaged 
matter  may  be  shown  by  a  +  ,  or  the  number  of  pages,  ascertained  by  counting, 
may  be  given  in  brackets.  Give  paging  in  arabic  or  roman  figures,  according  to 
the  book.  In  unpaged  works,  and  in  works  having  the  pages  lettered,  or  numbered 
in  figures  other  than  arabic  or  roman  (e.  g.  Greek)  the  number  of  pages  may  be 
given  in  brackets,  the  signatures  being  noted  only  in  the  case  of  rare  or  important 
works. 

i6i  Illustrations,  etc.  Give  illustrations  in  the  following  order:  frontis- 
piece, illustrations,  plates,  photographs,  portraits,  maps,  plans,  facsimiles,  tables, 
diagrams. 

Give  the  number  of  plates,  maps,  etc.,  when  it  can  be  easily  ascertained. 

Plates,  portraits,  etc.  are  to  be  specified  whether  included  in  the  paging  or  not. 

162  Collation  of  rare  works.  In  the  case  of  rare  works  reference  may  also 
be  made  in  notes  to  detailed  descriptions  and  collations  given  in  bibliographical 
works. 

163  Imperfect  copies.  In  cataloging  an  imperfect  copy,  mention  the  defi- 
ciencies in  a  note. 

164  Size.  Give  height  of  book  in  centimeters,  exact  to  one-half  centimeter. 
That  is,  if  exact  height  be 


169"""  (16.9'''")  write 

17cm, 

170"'™  (17'™) 

1 7'"™. 

171"""  (I7.I'"'" 

I7'"". 

172™"'  (17.2"") 

17cm. 

173"™  bi-y"") 

I7>^'"". 

I74">™  (17.4'"") 

I7>^''". 

175"""  (17-5='") 

iiyi'"^. 

176"-  (17.6'=™) 

17  y^"". 

177™"  (17.7"") 

I7K'""- 

,78mm  (17.8=™) 

IS''™. 

lygmm   (17.9cm) 

1 8"°. 

When  books  are  "narrow,"  "square,"  "oblong,"  or  otherwise  of  very  un- 
usual size,  give  both  dimensions,  e.g. 

17  X  IC™  (a  narrow  book) 
17  X  14""  (a  square  book) 
17  X  28"""  (an  oblong  book) 

(cf.  Cutter,  279  and  p.  155-156) 

165   Atlases.*    Atlases  which  accompany  any  given  work  are  not  as  a  rule  to 
be  cataloged  separately.    After  imprint  and  collation  write  and  atlas. 

Mahon,  Dennis  Hart.     Industrial  drawing  ...     By  D.  H.  Mahan  ...     Nev/ 
York,  J.  Wiley  &  srins,  1877. 

xiii,  209  p.    col.  front,  (plan)  illus.    24"°.  and  atlas  of  30  fold.  pi.    23K''"' 

When  the  title  of  the  atlas  differs  from  that  of  the  main  work  (and  more  par- 
♦  Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  17. 


COLLATION  51 

ticularly  when  there  is  a  special  compiler)  for  form  of  entry  usually  adopted  for 

indexes  is  to  be  preferred. 

Mirabeau,  Honore  Gabriel  Riquetti,  comte  de.    De  la  monarchic  prussienne 
sous  Frederic  le  Grand  ...     Londrcs,  1788. 

4  V.    front,  (port.)  pi.,  tables  (partly  fold.)    26"". 

Atlas  de  la  monarchic  prussienne.     Londres,  1788. 

2  p.  1.,  4  p.,  93  pi.,  10  maps,  tal)les  (partly  fold.)    41"". 
The  maps  are  by  Edme  Mentelle. 
Added  entry:  Mentelle,  Edme. 

Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  i 

The  collation  is  to  be  given  in  a  separate  line  immediately  after  the  imprint  {i.  e.  after 
place,  publisher,  and  date)  and  in  the  following  order:  1st,  paging;  2d,  illustrations:  3i. 
size. 

PAGING 

1  Paging  is  to  be  given  for  works  of  one  volume  only. 

2  When  a  work  consists  of  more  than  one  volume,  give  the  number  of  volumes.  If  the 
volumes  are  paged  continuously,  add  a  note  giving  the  paging: 

2  V.     24'''". 

Paged  continuously;  v.  i :  vi,  536  p.;  v.  2:  i  p.  1.,  537-999  p.,  2  L 

3  Give  unnumbered  printed  pages  in  brackets: 

vi,  [41-256  p. 
xiv,  (121,  450  P- 
8  p.  I.,  360,  (161  p. 

4  Give  unpaged  matter  as  leaves  when  one  side  of  the  leaf  is  blank: 

xii  p.,  2  1.,  192  p. 
See  also  5. 

5  Half-title,  title,  preface,  contents,  or  other  preliminary  matter,  when  not  included  in 
paging,  is  to  be  specified  as  "preliminary  leaves." 

3P-  1-,  35op. 

1  p.  1.,  vi  p.,  I  ].,  608  p.,  2  1. 

When  the  actual  number  of  preliminary  pages  is  either  greater  or  smaller  than  thai 
indicated  by  the  first  numbered  page,  write: 

4  p.  1.,  [iii)-xii  p.     not  3  p.  1.,  xii  p. 

5  p.  1.,  xv-xx  p. 
but 

vi,  35ip.     «o^  2  p.  1.,  [vi-vi,  351  p. 

6  Give  numbered  leaves  as  follows: 

218  numb.  1. 

10  p.  1.,  112  numb.  1.,  3  1. 

2  p.  1.,  X  p.,  180  numb.  1.,  4  p. 

7  When  the  preface,  contents,  etc.  are  paged  in  roman,  write: 

xii,  1131-240  p.     not  240  p. 
See  also  5. 

8  When  a  pamphlet  or  book,  bound  or  unboimd,  has  no  other  title-page  than  the  cover- 
title,  this  is  to  be  included  in  the  collation. 

cover-title,  85  p. 
cover-title,  iii,  112  p. 
cover-title,  131-36  p. 
cover-title,  (V]-xiii  p. 
cover-title,  2  p.  1.,  40  p. 

9  When  the  paging  is  very  complicated  it  is  generally  advisable  to  give  the  total  in 
brackets,  instead  of  the  separate  paginations,  adding  as  a  note: 

Various  paging. 


52  COLLATION 

ILLUSTRATIONS 

Illustrations  are  to  be  given  in  the  follownng  order  and  form:  front.,  illus.,*  pi.,*  phot., 
port.,  map  (or  mape).  plan  (or  plans),  facsim.,  tab.,  diagr.  When  there  is  more  than  one 
plate,  portrait,  etc..  and  the  number  is  not  specified  in  the  collation,  use  the  plural:  fronts., 
illus.,  plates,  photos.,  ports.,  maps,  plans,  facsims.,  tables,  diagrs. 

1  WTien  the  illustrations  are  colored,  write:  col.  front.,  col.  plates,  facsims.  in  colors, 
etc.,  etc.    In  the  case  of  maps  and  diagrams  specify  only  when  important. 

2  When  frontispiece,  plates,  maps,  etc.  are  included  in  the  paging,  write: 

xvi,  357  p.  incl.  front.,  illus.,  plates,  maps. 

3  Any  illustration,  other  than  an  engraved  title,  facing  or  immediately  preceding  the 
title-p>age  shall  be  designated  in  the  collation  as  a  frontispiece,  thus: 

front. 

front.  (F>ort.) 
front,  (map) 

hut  not 
front,  (pi.) 
When  the  book  contains  other  illustrations  of  the  same  character  the  sp)ecification 
after  "front."  is  to  be  omitted: 

front.,  illus.,  plates,  ports. 

not 
front,  (port.)  illus..  plates,  ports. 
When  there  are  two  or  more  volumes,  all  or  some  of  which  have  frontispieces,  write, 
as  the  case  may  be: 

4  V.  fronts. 

2  V.  front,  (v.  2) 

5  V.  fronts,  (v.  1-2) 
10  V.  fronts,  (v.  i,  4) 

4  When  the  number  of  plates,  map>s,  etc.  can  be  easily  ascertained,  e.  g.  when  they  are 
numbered,  listed,  or  collected,  or,  if  distributed  through  the  text,  when  they  are  on  heavy 
paper,  state  the  number: 

a)   As  given  in  the  book : 

2  pi.,  LV  maps. 
XLUipl.,  8  maps, 
front.,  30  pi.  (facsim.) 
illus.,  10  facsim.  on  6  pi. 

When  the  actual  number  differs,  add  it  in  curves: 
Lxxx  (t.  e.  83)  pi.,  8  maps. 

b)  As  ascertained  by  count,  giving  the  number  in  arable: 

30    pi.,  6  port.,  3  maps. 

c)  WTien  there  are  two  or  more  volumes  and  the  plates,  etc.  are  numbered  separately 
in  each  volume,  give  the  total  in  arabic  figures,  thus: 

3  V.     40  pi. 
not 

3  V.    X,  XVI  ,xrv  pi. 

d)  In  cataloging  an  imperfect  copy  give  in  the  collation  the  number  of  plates,  etc. 
which  the  book  should  contain,  and  in  a  note  state  the  defects  of  the  copy  in  question. 

5  Wlien  the  illustrations  in  trie  text  include  portraits,  maps,  facsimiles,  etc..  which  form 
an  important  feature  of  the  book  ana  would  which  not  otherwise  be  brought  out,  they  may 
be  specified  in  the  collation  as  follows: 

2  p.  1.,  296  p.    illus.  (incl.  pots..,  maps,  facsims.) 
iv,  348  p.     illus.  (incl.  ports.,  facsim.)  plates,  maps. 
V^Tien  portraits  or  any  other  particular  kind  of  illuslraiions  occur  both  in  the  text  and 
in  the  form  of  plates,  those  in  the  text  need  not  be  specifiet* : 
illus,,  ports. 
not  illus,  (ind.  ports.)  port. 

*  Illus.  as  here  used  stands  for  illustrations  in  the  text,  as  distinguished  from  plates,  plate 
meaning  a  full  page  iUustration  printed  on  a  lea/  the  verso  of  wh'cn  is  blank. 


COLLATION 


53 


7Cin 


''cm 
2cm 


illus.  (incl.  maps)  ports.,  facsim. 
not  illus.  (incl.  ports.,  maps)  port.,  facsim. 
Tables  in  the  text  (when  a  feature  of  the  book,  e.  g.  tables  in  mathematical,  statistical 
and  technical  works)  are  not  to  be  regarded  as  included  under  "illustrations";  they  are  to 
be  specified  in  the  collation,  e.  g. 
487  p.  incl.  tables. 
487  p.  incl.  illus.,  tables,  diagrs. 
When  there  are  tables  both  in  the  text  and  in  the  form  of  plates,  only  the  latter  need,  as 
a  rule,  be  specified,  e.  g. 

487  p.     illus.,  tables. 
When  a  book  is  chiefly  made  up  of  tables,  e.  g.  tables  of  logarithms,  annuities,  etc.,  omit 
"tables"  in  the  collation. 

6  For  mathematical  or  mechanical  diagrams  use  the  abbreviation  "diagr.,"  not  "illus." 

7  The  word  music  is  not  to  be  used  in  collation.    The  fact  that  the  book  contains  music 
is  to  be  brought  out  in  a  note  when  not  stated  in  the  title. 

SIZE 

1  Give  the  height  of  a  book  in  centimeters,  exact  to  one-half  centimeter.    Thus,  if  the 
exact  height  be 

169""°  (16.9='°)  write  17"'°. 
170""°  (17'"")  17" 

171""°  (17.1"'°)  17" 

172°""  (17. 2<"")  17*= 

173"""  (ly-s""")         T-iH" 
174°""  (17.4"'")         lyK*" 

175°""  (I7-5'"")  i7>^' 

176°"°  (17.6'"°)  17^" 

1,7mm  (17.7"")  171^'= 

j^gmm  (ly.gH  l{ 

179"°™  (17.9'='°)  18"™. 

If  it  is  desired  to  give  the  exact  measurement  of  a  plate,  map,  or  an  extraordinary  book 
(e.  g.  "microscopic  "  edition)  give  the  size  in  millimeters:  as, 
271  X  345'"'"- 

2  When  books  are  "narrow,"  "square,"  or  "oblong,"  or  otherwise  of  very  unusual  size, 
give  both  dimensions;  as, 

17  X  10"™  (a  narrow  book,  width  less  than  3/5  height) 
17  X  14"™  (a  square  book,  width  more  than  3/^  height) 
17  X  28*""  (an  oblong  book,  width  more  than  height) 

3  When  there  are  two  or  more  volumes  of  the  same  work  differing  in  size,  write: 

2  V.     18'"°  (v.  2:  I5'''") 

5  v.     25'"°  (v.  I,  4:  23""') 

3  V.  in  I.     22<""  (v.  1-2:  i9<^™) 

4  When  several  pamphlets  or  works  of  different  sizes  are  bound  together,  write: 

HaddonfieLd,  N.  J.    Grand  centennial  celebration,  July  4th,  1876,  at  Haddon- 
field,  N.  J.     Programme.     Philadelphia,  W.  Mann,  printer  11876] 

[41  p.    IQ""™.    [With  [Clement,  John)  Revolutionary  reminiscences  of  Cam- 
den County.    Camden,  N.  J.,  1876.    25'""'i 

5  In  the  case  of  serials  varying  sizes  may  be  indicated  thus: 

24  V.     18-24"'™. 
The  extra  size  of  a  given  volume  or  volumes  may  be  specified,  when  practicable,  in  the 
contents  or  in  a  note. 

6  When  an  atlas  or  a  portfolio  of  plates  accompanying  any  given  work  is  not  to  be  cata- 
loged separately,  it  is  to  be  noted  immediately  after  the  collation  of  the  work  itself. 

a)  When,  as  is  usually  the  case,  the  atlas  and  the  work  are  of  different  sizes,  write: 

3  p.  1.,  100  p.     illus.     25'""'.  and  atlas  of  40  pi.     27>2"". 

4  V.     24*"".  and  portfolio  of  24  pi.     30""". 

ix  p.,  1 1.,  360  p.,  I  1.     front.,  illus.     18"™.  and  atlas.     2^  \  25"". 

5  V.     20'"°.  atid  atlas  of  18  pi.,  14  maps.     28" 


2cm 


54  SERIES    NOTE 

b)  When  they  are  o  •  the  same  size,  write: 
2  V.    and  atlas.    24"°. 
I  p.  1.,  vh,  4cx>  p.   and  atlas.    26"". 

166  Series  note.  Give  the  name  of  the  series  to  which  the  book  belongs  in 
parenthesis  after  the  collation,  preceded  by  Half-title,  On  cover,  etc.  if  the  series 
does  not  appear  on  the  title-page.    (Eclectic,  264-269) 

The  words  "Half-title,"  "On  cover,"  etc.  may  be  omitted  on  written  cards. 

Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule  2. 

1  TTie  series  note  is  to  be  given  immediately  after  the  collation  in  the  form  in  which  it 
occurs  on  the  title-page.    Its  omission  from  the  title  is  to  be  indicated  by  three  dots  (...) 

Hale,  Susan.     ...  The  story  of  Mexico,  by  Susan  Hale.     New  York,  G.  P. 
Putnam's  sons;  (etc.,  etc.)  1889. 

xvi,  428  p.   col.  front.,  illus.,  fold.  map.   20"".    (The  story  of  the  nations 
IV.  231) 
Thilenius,  Georg.     ...  Ethnographische  ergebnisse  aus  Melanesien.     Von  dr. 
G.  Thilenius  ...     Halle,  Druck  von  E.  Karras,  in  commission  bei  W.  Engelmann, 
Leipzig,  1902-03. 

2  V.  illus.,  XXV  pi.  (incl.  2  maps)  32  x  24>^'''".  (Nova  acta.  Abh.  der 
Kaiserl.  Leop.-Carol.  deutschen  akademie  der  naturforscher,  bd.  XXXL,  nr. 
1-2) 

2  When  the  series  is  not  given  on  the  title-page  the  form  in  which  it  appears  is  to  be 
specified  as  follows: 

a)  When  it  occurs  on  a  special  title-page,  on  the  half-title,  or  on  the  cover,  write  in 
the  usual  place: 

{Added  t.-p. :  Les  litteratures  populaires  de  toutes  les  nations  ...  t.  xliv) 
{Half-title:  ...  Early  English  text  society.    Extra  series,  no.  Lxxxn) 
{Hdf-title:  Riverside  edition.    The  writings  of  ...  Whittier,  v.  7) 
{On  cover :  True  stories  of  great  Americans) 
{On  cover :  The  complete  writings  of  Theodore  Roosevelt) 

Repeat  the  author's  name  in  the  series  note  when  the  latter  would  otherwise  be  am- 
biguous, thus: 

P6rez  Gald6s,  Benito,  1845-         Miau;  por  B.  Perez  Galdos.    Madrid,  Impr. 
de  la  Guirnalda,  1888. 

432  p.  19"™.  {On  cover :  Novelas  espaiiolas  contemporaneas  por  B.  Perez 
Galdos) 

If  the  authorship  is  self-evident,  omit  the  author's  name;  as, 
{Half-title :  Complete  works  ...  v.  8) 

not 
{Half-title :  Complete  works  of  William  Wordsworth,  v.  8) 
WTien  the  series  entry  is  other  than  a  title  entry,  i.  e.  an  entry  under  author,  editor, 
publisher,  society,  etc.,  the  latter  should  be  included  in  brief  form  in  the  series  note,  thus: 

Hawes,  Stephen,  d.  1523?    The  pastime  of  pleasure  ...  by  Stephen  Hawes  ... 
London,  Printed  for  the  Percy  society,  by  T.  Richards,  1845. 

2  p.  1.,  xii,  220  p.  I9>^"".  {Added  t.-p. :  Percy  society.  Early  English 
poctr>-  ...  1846.    vol.  xvin) 

b)  When  the  information  is  obtained  from  publisher's  list  in  the  book,  or  from  out- 
side sources,  use  brackets  instead  of  f)arenthesis;  as, 

(International  scientific  series,  v.  i5j 

3  When  the  series  title  occurs  both  on  the  regula  r  title-j)age  and  on  a  separate  title- 
page  the  following  form  is  to  be  used : 

Aust,  Emil.     ...  Die  religion  der  Romer.     Von  Emil  Aust.     MQnster  i.  W., 
Aschendorff,  1899. 

viii,  268,  (Up.    24K"".    {Added  t.-p. :  Darstellungen  aus  dem  gebiete  der 
nichtchristlichen  religionsgeschichte.    xiii) 
Series  title  also  at  head  of  t.-p. 


CONTENTS,  NOTES  55 

CONTENTS,  NOTES,  ADDED  ENTRIES,  ANALYTICAL 
ENTRIES,  REFERENCES 

167  Contents.  Give  contents  of  books  containing  several  works  by  the  same 
author,  or  works  by  several  authors,  or  works  on  several  subjects,  or  a  single 
work  on  a  number  of  distinct  subjects,  especially  if  the  collective  title  does  not 
sufficiently  describe  them. 

The  designation  of  parts,  volumes,  faciculi,  or  other  divisions  of  a  work  is 
to  be  given  in  the  language  of  the  book.    {cj.  174,  Figures:   Contents) 

Give  contents  in  the  order  in  which  they  appear  in  the  book,*  and  in  para- 
graph form  rather  than  in  columns  except  in  special  cases  where  the  latter  ar- 
rangement has  decided  advantages.  In  case  different  parts  are  written  by  dif- 
ferent authors,  let  the  name  of  the  author  follow  rather  than  precede  the  title, 
provided  always  this  is  the  order  of  arrangement  in  the  book. 

(Cutter,  281-283) 

Chicago.    University.     ...  Investigations  representing  the  departments.    Se- 
mitic languages  and  literatures,  Biblical  and  patristic  Greek  ... 

Contents :  Greek  papyri  from  the  Cairo  museum,  together  with  papyri  of 
Roman  Egypt  from  American  collections,  by  E.  J.  Goodspeed. — The  battle 
of  Kadesh,  by  J.  H.  Breasted. — The  structure  of  the  text  of  the  book  of 
Amos,  by  W.  R.  Harper. — Some  literary  remains  of  Rim-Sin  (.Arioch),  king 
of  Larsa,  about  2285  b.  c,  by  I.  M.  Price. — Some  principles  of  literary  criti- 
cism and  their  application  to  the  synoptic  problem,  by  E.  D.  Burton. 

Breithaupt,  Rudolf  Maria.     ...  Musikalische  zeit-  und  streitfragen.    Gesam- 
melte  skizzen  und  aufsatze.    Von  Rudolf  M.  Breithaupt  ... 

Contents:  1.  bd.  Kunst  und  musikwissenschaft.  Musik  und  schule. 
Jugendkonzerte.  Opernkrise  und  stoflfnot.  Mehr  Mozart!  Bismarck  und 
die  musik.  Hugo  Wolff.  Ein  Richard  Wagner-denkmal. — 2.  bd.  Moderne 
klavieristen.  Eldvard  Grieg.  Kunstmusik  und  lebenskunst.  Sub  specie 
aeternitatis  (Zum  100.  todestage  Schillers)    Mozart  und  die  zeitmusik. 

Taine,  Hippolyte  Adolphe.    Les  origines  de  la  France  contemporaine,  par  H. 
Taine  ... 

Contents:  1.  ptie.  t.  i-ii.  L'ancien  regime. — 2.  ptie.  t.  iii-viii.  La 
revolution:  (II  L'anarchie.  [2]  La  conquete  jacobine.  131  Le  gouvernement 
revolutionnairc. — 3.  ptie.  t.  ix-xi.  Le  regime  moderne.  t.  [Xiil  Index 
general. 

168  Notes.  Add  notes  when  necessary  to  explain  the  title  or  to  correct  any 
misapprehension  to  which  it  might  lead,  and  also  to  supply  essential  information 
about  the  author  and  bibliographical  details  not  given  in  the  title,  imprint,  or 
collation. 

Notes  are  to  be  in  English,  except  quotations  from  foreign  sources,  which  are 
to  be  given  preferably  in  the  original.  The  source  of  the  quotation  is  always  to 
be  specified,  and  the  original  punctuation,  spelling,  etc.  to  be  preserved,  even  if 
it  conflicts  with  other  ruling. 

Notes  may  be  used  to  cover  the  following  points:  bibliographies,  authorities, 
etc.,  pseudonyms  and  anonyms,  sequels,  variations  in  title,  editors  and  transla- 
tors, editions,  various  places,  publishers,  or  dates,  reprints,  languages  of  the 

*  In  special  cases,  where  such  arrangement  has  decided  advantages,  contents  may  be 
arranged  alphabetically  by  names  of  authors  or  subjects. 


50  ADDED    ENTRIES,    ANALYTICAL    ENTRIES,    REFERENCES 

text,  source  of  the  book  if  first  published  serially,  no  more  published,  imperfec- 
tions in  copy,  bound  with  something  else.* 
(Cutter,  284) 

Aimard,  Gustave.     The  border  rifles,  a  narrative;  by  Gustave  Aimard  ... 
Rev.  and  ed.  by  Percy  B.  St.  John. 

Translation  of  Les  r6dcurs  des  frontiercs. 
Sequel  of  Trappers  of  Arkansas.    Sequel:    The  freebooters. 
Added  entry:  St  John,  Percy  Bolingbroke,  ed. 
Rae,  John.    The  sociological  theory  of  capital ;  being  a  complete  reprint  of  the 
New  principles  of  political  economy,  1834,  by  John  Rae  ...     Ed.,  with  biographi- 
cal sketch  and  notes,  by  Charles  Whitney  Mixter  ... 

Originally  published  under  title:  Statement  of  some  new  principles  on  the 
subject  of  political  economy,  exposing  the  fallacies  of  the  system  of  free 
trade,  and  of  some  other  doctrines  maintained  in  the  "  Wealth  of  nations." 
Added  entry:  Mixter,  Charles  Whitney,  ed. 

169  Added  entries.  In  addition  to  those  specified  in  previous  rules,  make 
added  entries  for  the  titles  of  all  novels  and  plays  and  of  poems  likely  to  be 
remembered  by  their  titles;  for  other  striking  titles;  for  editors;  and  in  all  cases 
kvhere  an  added  entry  will  insure  the  ready  finding  of  the  book.  (Cutter,  135, 
148-150,  153-155.    Eclectic,  301-309,  315-319) 

The  number  of  added  entries  will  depend  upon  the  character  of  the  library.  In  a  card 
catalog  which  uses  printed  cards  chiefly  or  exclusively,  added  entries  frequently  take  the 
place  of  references.  As  these  entries  are  made  by  writing  the  headings  at  the  top  of  the 
printed  cards,  a  full  entry  appears  under  each  heading;  in  a  written  catalog,  on  the  other 
hand,  added  entries  are  generally  abbreviated,    {cf.  p.  78,  Sample  cards) 

170  Anal3rtical  entries.  Analytical  entries  under  author  or  title  may  be  made 
for  distinct  parts  of  works  or  collections,  whether  with  or  without  separate  title- 
pages.    (Cutter,  193-196,  241,  275) 

171  References.  References  should  be  freely  made  from  alternative  forms  to 
the  form  of  heading  chosen,  e.  g.  when  an  author,  personal  or  corporate,  has  been 
known  by  more  than  one  name,  refer  from  the  name  or  names  not  used  as  head- 
ing to  the  one  selected. 

Lubbock,  Sir  John,  see  Avebury,  John  Lubbock,  ist  baron. 
Columbian  university,  Washington,  see  George  Washington  university. 

Specific  directions  are  given  in  the  preceding  rules,  cf.  also  i6q  and  Cutter,  no,  285- 
286. 

*  The  following  order  is  usually  adopted  by  the  Library  of  Congress  for  its  printed  cards: 

1  Series  note  (in  parenthesis)  immediately  after  collation. 

2  Descriptive  and  bibliographical  notes. 

a)  Physical  description:  collation,  etc.,  e.  g. 

Paged  continuously. 
Illustrations. 
Large  paper. 
Limited  edition. 

b)  Literary  form  and  notes  explaining  the  title,  e.  g. 

Poems. 
Drama. 

c)  Notes  on  authorship,  editors,  etc. 

d)  Bibliographical  history  of  the  book,  e.  g. 

Relation  to  other  editions. 

Original  issue. 

No  more  published. 

e)  Partial  contents,  as 

Bibliography:  p.  — 
Appendix:  p.  — 

f)  Contents. 


CAPITALS  57 

CAPITALS,  PUNCTUATION,  FIGURES 

172  Capitals.  Initial  capital  letters  are  to  be  used  for  names  of  persons, 
personifications,  places,  and  bodies,  for  substitutes  for  proper  names,  and  for 
adjectives  derived  from  these  names;  for  the  first  word  of  the  title  of  a  book;  in 
title  entries  (anonymous  works,  periodicals,  etc.)  for  the  second  word  of  the 
title  if  the  first  is  an  article.  In  all  doubtful  cases  avoid  the  use  of  capitals.  In 
foreign  languages  follow  the  local  practice. 

For  libraries  which  dosire  a  more  specific  statement  the  following  revision  of  the 
Library  of  Congress  rules  on  the  use  of  capitals,  printed  as  Appendix  I  in  the  Ad- 
vance edition  of  1902,  may  be  of  service. 

a)  Capitalize  the  first  word  of  every  sentence,  every  title  occurring  on  the 

title-page,  every  title  quoted,  and  every  alternative  title  introduced  by  "or"  or 

its  equivalent.    In  quoting  titles  of  serials  like  the  Nation,  the  Times,  la  Revue 

philanthropique,  capitalize  not  the  article  but  the  word  following. 

Soldiers  three,  The  story  of  the  Gadsbys,  In  black  and  white;  by  Rudyard  Kipling. 
Selections  from  the  Idylls  of  the  king. 
Palmer's  index  to  the  Times  newspaper. 

b)  Capitalize  the  word  following  an  initial  article  in  serials  and  collections, 

when  entered  under  title.* 

The  Quarterly  journal  of  economics. 
A  Hundred  merry  tales. 

c)  Capitalize  all  proper  names,  as  names  of  persons,  places,  etc.,  except  those 
otherwise  provided  for  in  these  rules. 

Richard  Roe,  North  America,  etc. 

d)  Adjectives  used  substantively  to  denote  a  race  or  individual  members  of  a 
race  or  people  are  to  be  capitalized  in  the  chief  European  languages,  exceptions 
being  Spanish,  Portuguese,  and  the  Scandinavian  languages. 

the  English,  une  Frangaise,  gli  Italiani;  but  los  espanoles,  danskerne,  tyskarne. 

e)  In  English,  when  a  geographic  name  consists  of  a  distinctive  and  a  generic 

word,  capitalize  both.f 

Mississippi  River,  Bay  of  Fundy,  District  of  Columbia,  Suffolk  County,  Adiron- 
dack Mountains,  Lake  Ontario. 

When,  however,  the  generic  word  precedes  and  does  not  form  an  integral  part 
of  the  commonly  used  form  of  the  name,  it  is  not  to  be  capitalized, 
city  of  Boston,  state  of  Michigan. 

f)  Capitalize  designations  in  common  use  as  substitutes  for  names  of  places, 

and  the  terms  North,  East,  etc.  when  used  alone  to  denote  a  definite  region. 

the  Empire  state,  the  Middle  kingdom,  la  terre  Jaune,  I'cmpire  du  Milieu,  the 
West. 

g)  Adjectives  derived  from  geographical  names  are  to  be  capitalized  in  Eng- 
lish and  Dutch  only. 

the  Austrian  succession,  de  Indische  fabel;  but  rhcinische  schiffahrt,  la  societ6 
parisiennc. 

*  In  the  titles  of  anonymous  books  the  word  following  an  initial  article  is  not  capitalized, 
but  is  printed  in  bold-face  type. 

fin  names  of  streets,  avenues,  squares,  and  similar  designations  the  generic  word  is  not 
as  a  rule  to  be  capitalized. 


58  CAPITALS 

Exceptions: 

1  Do  not  capitalize  geographical  adjectives  that  have  lost  their  original 
signification. 

india  ink,  gum  arabic,  roman  numerals. 

2  Capitalize  the  German  indeclinable  adjectives  ending  in  er. 

die  Naunheimcr  mundart. 

3  Capitalize  adjectives  used  alone  in  place  of  the  full  names  of  buildings, 
institutions,  etc. 

la  Vaticana,  la  Palatina,  etc. 

h)   Capitalize  names  of  languages  in  English  and  Dutch  only. 
French,  Maleisch;  but  franfais,  deutsch. 

i)    Adjectives  derived  from  names  of  persons  —  unless  used  in  a  generic  sense 

—  are  to  be  capitalized  in  English  and  Dutch.    In  other  languages  follow  local 

usage. 

Machiavellian  theories,  Riemannsch  oppervlak;  but  epicurean  tastes,  Societi 
dantesca  italiana. 

j)   Capitalize  by-names  affixed  to  and  epithets  standing  in  place  of  names  of 

persons. 

Gregorius  Turonensis,  Alexander  the  Great,  Friedrich  Barbarossa,  Julianas 
Apostata,  the  Pretender. 

k)  In  English  and  Dutch,  capitalize  titles  of  honor  and  distinction  imme- 
diately preceding  or  standing  instead  of  a  person's  name.  They  are  not  to  be 
capitalized  when  placed  after  the  name.  In  French,  German,  Italian,  Spanish, 
and  the  Scandinavian  languages  such  titles  are  to  begin  with  a  small  letter 
whether  they  precede  or  follow  the  name. 

Saint  Luke,  E^rl  Spencer,  Lieutenant-General  Grant,  Bishop  of  Albany,  Kolonel 
Slotcrdijk;  but  John  Stanley,  earl  of  Derby,  sainte  Brigitte,  le  due  de  Guise, 
I'abate  Antonio  Coppi,  Otto  fiirst  von  Bismarck. 

Abbreviations  of  titles  of  honor  or  distinction  preceding  personal  names  are  to 

be  capitalized  in  English,  French,  Dutch,  and  Spanish  only. 

the  Rt.  Rev.  Phillips  Brooks,  le  Ctc.  Weil.  Ste.  Brigitte,  Jonkhr.  W.  dc  Rivecourt, 
M.  R.  P.  Vr.  Bartolome  Alvarez  del  Manzano;  but  il  prof.  Turello,  priv.-doz. 
Rohrer. 

1)   Capitalize  titles  of  address,  whether  written  in  full  or  abbreviated,  except 

in  German  and  the  Scandinavian  languages. 

Monsieur,  Madame,  Signor,  Seftor,  Don,  Donna,  Mrs.,  Mile.;  ^herr,  frdken,  fru, 
jomfru. 

m)    Capitalize  the  first  word  not  an  article  of  the  names  of  societies  and  other 

organized  bodies,  as  government  departments,  legislative  bodies,  commissions, 

etc.    In  heading  and  imprint  capitalize  both  the  initial  article  and  the  following 

word. 

the  General  court. 

A  history  of  the  Century  co. 

New  York,  The  Century  co.,  1899. 


CAPITALS  59 

When,  however,  the  first  portion  of  the  name  consists  of  an  abbreviation  Hke 
I.,  K.,  R.,  etc.  (the  honorary  designations  frequently  prefixed  to  names  of  foreign 
societies  and  academies)  proceed  as  follows: 

a)  In  title,  imprint,  notes,  and  contents. 

Capitalize  the  word  following  the  titular  designation  when  the  latter  consists 
of  a  single-letter  abbreviation,  e.  g.  K.,  I.,  R.,  or  K.  K. 

R.  Accademia  delle  scienze  di  Torino. 
K.  K.  Akadetnie  dcr  bildenden  kiinste. 
N.  0.  Gcwerb-verein. 

If  the  abbreviation  consists  of  more  than  one  letter  do  not  capitalize  the  word 
following. 

Kgl.  Sachs,  ministerium  des  inncrn. 
Konigl.  bayr.  akadcmie  der  wisscnschaften. 
Grossherzogl.  badische  hof-  und  landesbibliothek. 
Nied.  osterr.  gewerb-verein. 

b)  In  headings. 

Always  capitalize  the  word  following  the  abbreviation. 

K.  Akademie  der  wisscnschaften,  Munich. 

Karlsruhe,  Grossh.  Badische  hof-  und  landesbibliothek. 

n)  Capitalize  in  English  the  first  word  of  the  names  of  buildings,  monuments, 
etc.    In  foreign  languages  follow  local  usage. 

Assembly  hall.  Peace  monument,  I'Hdtel  de  ville  de  Paris,  tour  des  Ventes. 

o)    Capitalize  in  names  of  societies  and  other  bodies,  and  in  names  of  streets, 

buildings,  monuments,  etc.,  all  arbitrary,  fanciful,  or  otherwise  purely  individual 

epithets,  including  such  words  as  have  lost  their  original  meaning. 

Star  and  Garter  inn.  Court  of  Oyer  and  Terminer,  Covent  Garden  (the  theater), 
Inner  Temple. 

p)    Capitalize  names  of  months,  days  of  the  week,  etc.,  in  English  and  Dutch 

only;  also  nouns  denoting  partisans  of  sects,  religious  orders,  political  parties, 

etc.,  and  adjectives  derived  from  them. 

Maandag,  Baptists,  Trappist,  Whigs;  but  samedi  le  29  avril,  janseniste,  benedet- 
tino. 

Names  of  noted  events  and  periods  are  not  to  be  capitalized, 
middle  ages,  civil  war,  reformation. 

q)  When  occurring  in  the  Latin  nominative  case,  scientific  names  of  sub- 
genera, genera,  and  all  higher  divisions  in  zoology  and  botany  are  to  be  capi- 
talized, but  names  of  species  and  varieties  are  not  to  be  capitalized.  All  zoolog- 
ical and  botanical  names  in  the  Latin  nominative  case  are  to  be  italicized. 
Scientific  names  popularly  used  are  to  take  capitals  and  italics  when  they  are 
names  of  divisions  of  the  animal  or  vegetable  kingdom,  as  Mammalia,  Fungi, 
and  not  mere  group  names  unrecognized  in  scientific  nomenclature,  as  "cacti." 

Lilium  grayi,  not  Lilium  Grayi. 

Salvinia  nutans,  but  De  salvinia  natante. 

The  genus  Stereocaulon,  but  De  stereocaulis. 

Genus  Hypnum,  subgenus  Amblystegium. 

Loasaceae,  but  loasaceen. 

Rosaceae,  but  rosacees. 

r)  Do  not  capitalize  common  nouns  in  any  language  even  when  national 
usage  prescribes  it. 


6o  PUNCTUATION,    FIGURES 

173  FHinctuation.  The  punctuation  of  the  title-page  is  generally  to  be  fol- 
lowed; if  there  is  no  punctuation  it  is  to  be  supplied.  As  far  as  possible,  the  use 
of  two  points  together  is  to  be  avoided. 

In  case  of  doubt  follow  De  Vinne's  "  Correct  composition,"  or  Bigelow's  "Punctuation." 

Accents.  Supply  accents  in  Greek  titles,  in  French  titles  after  1800,  and  in 
titles  in  other  languages  when  essential. 

Brackets.  Additions  to  the  title  or  to  the  imprint  should  be  inclosed  in  square 
brackets  [  ]* 

If  the  author's  name  is  not  given  on  the  title-page,  it  should  be  bracketed  in 
the  heading;  but  if  it  appears  on  the  title-page,  and  is  included  in  the  catalog 
entry,  names  or  parts  of  names  supplied  in  the  heading  need  not  be  bracketed. 

In  the  series  note,  when  the  information  is  obtained  from  a  publisher's  list  in 
the  book  or  from  outside  sources,  use  brackets  instead  of  parentheses. 

Parentheses.  Parentheses  are  used  to  signify  inclusion,  as  in  the  case  of  series 
notes  and  analytical  references;  also  to  indicate  the  maiden  names  of  married 
women. 

Dash.  The  dash  (-)  is  used  to  connect  numbers,  signifying  "to  and  includ- 
ing," e.  g.  1876- 1 886.    Following  a  number  it  signifies  continuation,  e.  g.  1900- 

A  longer  dash  ( — )  is  used  to  separate  items  of  contents. 

A  single  dash  or  indent  indicates  the  omission  of  the  preceding  heading;  a  sub- 
sequent dash  or  indent  indicates  the  omission  of  a  title. 

Marks  of  omission.  Marks  of  omission  (...)  are  used  to  indicate  omissions 
from  the  title. 

Interrogation  point.  The  interrogation  point  following  a  word,  date,  initial,  or 
other  item  of  the  entry,  signifies  doubtful  or  probable. 

Exclamation  point.  The  exclamation  point  is  used  on  printed  cards  to  indicate 
misprints  or  obvious  errors  in  spelling.  In  a  written  card  catalog  dots  below  (...) 
the  letter  or  word  are  used  for  the  same  purpose. 

Period.  The  period  is  used  (a)  for  abbreviations,  but  not  after  ist,  2d,  3d,  4th, 
etc.;  (b)  at  the  end  of  sentences  or  groups  of  items  {e.  g.  in  collation)  when  they 
end  with  no  other  point;  (c)  to  separate  the  main  heading  from  the  subheading; 
(d)  in  contents  (followed  by  a  dash)  to  separate  items. 

Semicolon.  A  semicolon  is  ordinarily  used  to  separate  the  title  proper  from 
the  phrase  relating  to  the  editor,  translator,  etc. 

174  Figures.    Use  arabic  figures  rather  than  roman. 

In  headings  roman  numerals  are  to  be  used  after  the  names  of  sovereigns, 
princes,  and  popes. 

Richard  iii,  Leo  xiii. 
In  titles  follow  the  title-page,  except  in  specifying  edition,  when  arabic  figures 
may  be  used. 

8th  ed.;  not  Eighth  ed. 
In  imprint  follow  rule  155. 

*  On  the  Library  of  Congress  printed  cards  angle  brackets  <  >  are  used  for  purposes  of 
distinction  to  indicate  brackets  actually  occurring  on  the  titlc-p)age. 


FIGURES  6 1 

In  collation  give  paging,  plates,  etc.  in  arabic  or  roman  figures  according  to  the 
notation  used  in  the  book. 

In  contents  arabic  figures  are  generally  to  be  used  for  the  designation  of  volumes, 
parts,  etc.,*  unless  roman  figures  have  been  employed  for  the  purpose  of  distin- 
guishing between  volumes  and  parts,  bande  and  abteilungen,  etc. 

For  explanation  of  numerals,  dates,  and  chronograms  see  Brown's  Manual  of 
practical  bibliography;  Power's  Handy-book  about  books;  WTieatley's  How  to 
catalogue  a  library;  Hilton's  Chronograms;  Rouveyre's  Connaissances  necessaires 
a  un  bibliophile,  5th  ed.,  v.  2,  and  other  authorities. 

*  Library  of  Congress  follows  the  form  given  in  the  book. 


APPENDIX  1 


ABBREVIATIONS 

The  following  list  is  not  intended  to  be  complete.  It  does  not  include  the 
ordinary  abbre\aations  for  names  of  states,  titles  of  honor,  etc.,  which  can  be 
easily  ascertained  by  referring  to  the  authorities  mentioned  below. 

The  ordinary  abbreviations  for  states  and  countries  may  be  used  in  a  heading  if 
they  do  not  stand  at  the  beginning. 

Words  in  the  title  proper  are  not  to  be  abbreviated.  Certain  abbreviations, 
indicated  in  the  following  list,  may  be  used  in  the  second  part  of  the  title  (referred 
to  below  as  "edition")  Abbreviations  which  appear  on  the  title-page  are  not  to 
be  changed. 

In  a  written  card  catalog  abbreviations  may  be  used  more  frequently  than  is 
desirable  for  printed  cards. 

Where  to  be  used 
series,  notes,  contents 
heading,  notes 
series,  notes,  contents 
heading 
edition,  notes 
edition 

edition,  notes 
series,  notes,  contents 
Iiea  Cling 
edition 

heading,  notes 
heading 
heading 
heading 
notes 

heading,  notes 
heading 
collation 
collation 
edition,  notes 
heading 
notes 

heading,  series  {e.  g.  49th  Cong.,  2d  sess.) 
imprint  (e.  g.  '^  1878) 
edition 

heading,  notes 

heading,  imprint,  series,  notes 
collation 
heading 

note  for  dissertations 
series,  notes,  (for  public  documents) 
edition,  series,  notes 
edition,  notes 
edition,  notes 
heading 


abteilung,  abtheilung 

abt.,  abth. 

Anno  Domini 

A.  D. 

appendix 

app.* 

archbishop 

abp. 

auflage 

aufl. 

augmented 

augm.* 

ausgabe 

ausg. 

band 

bd.* 

baronet 

bart. 

bearbeitet 

bearb.  * 

Before  Christ 

B.C. 

bishop 

bp. 

born 

b. 

century 

cent. 

chapter 

chap. 

circa 

ca. 

collector 

col. 

colored 

col. 

columns 

col. 

compiled 

comp.* 

compiler 

comp. 

confer  (compare) 

cf. 

Congress 

Cong. 

copyright 

c  (suijerior) 

corrected 

cor.* 

County 

Co. 

department 

dept. 

diagram,  -s 

diagr.,  diagrs. 

died 

d. 

dissertation 

diss. 

document 

doc. 

edited 

ed.* 

edition 

ed.» 

Mition 

M. 

editor 

ed. 

•  The  same  abbreviation  may  be  used  for  the  corresponding  word  in  another  language 
when  the  abbreviation  commonly  used  in  that  language  has  the  same  sjwlling,  e.  g.,  augm. 
for  augmentee,  impr.  for  imprcnta,  pub.  for  public,  tr.  for  traduit,  etc.,  etc. 


ABBREVIATIONS 


63 


engraved  title-page 

engr.  t.-p. 

notes 

engraver 

engr. 

heading 

enlarged 

enl. 

edition 

facsimile,  -s 

facsim.,  facsims. 

collation 

fascicle,  -  s 

fasc.* 

series,  notes,  contents 

folded 

fold. 

collation 

folio,  -  s 

fol. 

collation 

frontispiece,  -  s 

front.,  fronts. 

collation,  notes 

genealogical 

geneal. 

collation 

Government  printing 

office 
heft 

Govt,  print,  oflf. 

imprint 

hft.* 

series,  notes,  contents 

herausgegeben 

hrsg. 

edition,  series,  notes 

His  (Her)  Majesty's  Sta- 

H. M.  Stationery  off. 

imprint 

tionery  office 

id  est 

i.  e. 

heading,  collation,  notes 

illustration,  -  s 

illus. 

collation 

illustrator 

illus. 

heading 

imprimerie 

impr.* 

imprint 

inaugural-dissertation 

inaug.-diss. 

note  for  dissertations 

including 

incl. 

collation 

introduction 

introd. 

notes 

introductory 

introd. 

notes 

unior 

r 

heading,  notes 

eaf,  leaves 

collation 

lieferung 

!?«• 

series,  notes,  contents 

livraison 

livr. 

series,  notes,  contents 

manuscript,  -  s 

ms.,  mss. 

heading,  notes 

miscellaneous  document 

misc.  doc. 

series,  notes,  (for  public  documents) 

narrow 

nar. 

collation 

neue  folge 

n.f.* 

series,  notes 

new  series 

n.s.*  or  new  sen 

series,  notes 

no  date  of  publication 

n.d. 

imprint 

no  place  of  publication 

n.p. 

imprint 

nouvelle 

nouv. 

edition 

number,  -  s 

no.* 

series,  notes,  contents 

numbered 

numb. 

collation 

oblong 

obi. 

collation                                     i 

page,  -  s 

p.* 

collation,  notes 

part,  -  s 

pt. 

series,  notes,  contents 

partie 

ptie. 

series,  notes,  contents 

photograph,  -  s 

phot.,  photos. 

collation 

portrait,  -  s 

port.,  ports. 

collation 

preface 

pref. 

imprint,  notes 

president 

pres. 

heading 

privately  printed 

priv.  print. 

imprint 

pseudonym 

pseud. 

heading 

published 

pub.* 

edition,  series,  notes 

publisher 

pub. 

heading 

regiment 

regt. 

heading 

report 

rept. 

series,  notes,  (for  public  documents) 

revised 

rev.* 

edition,  notes 

senior 

sr. 

heading,  notes 

serie 

s^r. 

series,  notes,  contents 

series 

sen 

series,  notes,  contents 

signature,  -  s 

sig. 

notes 

square 

sq. 

collation 

superintendent 

supt. 

heading 

supplement 

suppl.* 

series,  notes,  contents 

table 

tab. 

collation 

teil,  theil 

t.,  th. 

series,  notes,  contents 

title-page 

t.-p. 

series,  notes 

tome 

t.* 

series,  notes,  content!. 

*  The  same  abbreviation  may  be  used  for  the  corresponding  word  in  another  language 
when  the  abbreviation  commonly  used  in  that  language  has  the  same  spelling,  e.  g.,  augm. 
for  augmentee,  impr.  for  imprenta,  pub.  for  publie,  tr.  for  traduit,  etc.,  etc. 


64 


ABBREVIATIONS 


translated 

tr.* 

edition,  notes 

translator 

tr. 

heading 

typographic 

typ. 

imprint 

iibersetzt,  uebersetzt 

libers., 

,  uebers. 

edition,  notes 

umgearbcitct 

umgearb. 

edition 

\erbcsserte 

verb. 

edition 

vcrmehrte 

verm. 

edition 

volume,  -  s 

V. 

collation,  series,  notes,  contents 

X'olume,  -  s 

Vol. 

notes  (at  beginning) 

versus 

vs. 

heading 

For  additional  abbreviations  see  Cutter,  Rules  for  a  dictionary  catalog,  4th  ed.,  p.  157- 
164;  Library  school  rules,  p.  35-39,  or  Simplified  Library  school  rules,  p.  71-77;  Library 
journal,  1887,  p.  187-192  (Woodruff) 

*  The  same  abbreviation  may  be  used  for  the  corresponding  word  in  another  language 
when  the  abbreviation  commonly  used  in  that  language  has  the  same  spelling,  e.  g.,  augm. 
(jr  augmentee,  impr.  for  imprenta,  pub.  for  publie,  tr.  for  traduit,  etc.,  etc. 


APPENDIX  2 
REPORT  OF  THE  A.  L.  A.  TRANSLITERATION  COMMITTEE 

This  Report  was  made  to  the  American  Library  Association  in  1885,  and  printed  in  the 
Proceedings  of  the  Lake  George  Conference,  and  in  the  Library  Journal,  10:  302-8. 

In  determining  the  principles  of  transliteration  it  must  be  remembered  that  a 
catalog  is  not  a  learned  treatise  intended  for  special  scholars,  and  bound  to  an 
erudite  consistency,  at  whatever  cost  of  convenience.  It  is  simply  a  key  to  open 
the  doors  of  knowledge  to  a  partly  ignorant  and  partly  learned  public,  and  it  is 
very  important  that  such  a  key  should  turn  easily,  A  good  catalog,  therefore,  will 
be  a  compromise  between  the  claims  of  learning  and  logic  on  the  one  hand,  and  of 
ignorance,  error,  and  custom  on  the  other.  Speaking  generally,  that  form  of  name 
must  be  chosen  with  which  people  now  are,  and  in  the  future  will  be,  most  familiar. 
This  reference  to  the  future  is  important.  The  catalog  must  not  be  in  advance  of 
its  age;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  it  will  not  be  well  that  it  should  be  behind  the  next 
generation.  If,  therefore,  there  is  an  evident  current  of  progress  in  any  direction 
the  makers  of  the  catalog  will  do  well  to  be  a  httle  before  the  present  practice,  in 
the  hope  that  the  world  will  soon  catch  up  with  them,  not  to  pass  them  before  the 
catalog  itself  has  been  superseded  by  another.  The  larger  the  catalog,  therefore, 
and  the  less  likely  to  be  soon  reprinted,  the  more  may  it  venture  to  be  ahead  of  the 
times.  Nevertheless  the  maker  will  do  well  to  remember  that  the  future  is  very 
uncertain. 

One  evident  current  of  progress  there  is, —  in  favor  of  adopting  the  continental 
value  of  the  vowels,  representing  the  ou  sound,  for  instance,  not  by  ou  nor  by  00 
(as  does  Dr.  Thomas),  but  by  w;  writing,  therefore,  Butan,  not  Boutan  nor 
Bootan,  Turgenef  and  not  Tourgueneff ;  using  also  a  and  not  ah  for  the  sound  of 
a  in  father,  papa  (speaking  as  a  New  Englander) ;  using  the  i  for  the  English  e 
sound;  and  giving  what  are  unfortunately  called  the  corresponding  short  sounds 
by  doubling  the  following  consonant;  thus  Nana  would  be  spelt  with  one  n,  but 
Nanny  with  two.  This  tendency,  which  has  been  gathering  strength  for  some 
time,  has  at  last  received  the  sanction  of  an  influential  body,  the  Royal  Geo- 
graphical Society,  and  can  be  followed  with  safety. 

The  following  notes  are  taken  mostly  from  Mr.  Heilprin's  articles  in  the  Nation: 

1  For  ancient  Greek  names  use  the  Latin  forms,  e.  g.  Homerus  not  Homeros, 
Plato  not  Platon,  Philippus  not  Philippos.  But  where  two  forms  are  in  common 
use  choose  that  which  is  nearest  the  Greek. 

2  For  Egyptian  names  known  to  us  through  the  Greek,  both  the  Greek  and 
the  Egyptian  forms  (as  Cheops  and  Shufu)  should  be  given,  with  a  reference  from 
the  one  which  is  not  chosen  for  the  main  entry. 


66  APPENDIX     2 

3  Biblkal  names  are  to  be  written  as  we  find  them  in  the  English  Bible,  and 
the  names  of  post-Biblical  Jews,  if  derived  from  the  Scriptures,  should  retain  their 
Anglicized  form.  On  the  other  hand,  a  strict  transliteration  is  demanded  of 
rabbinical  and  other  more  or  less  pure  Hebrew  names  which  are  not  taken  from 
Scriptures,  and  therefore  have  no  |X)pular  English  forms,  to  which,  again,  there  is 
an  exception  in  the  case  of  a  few  celebrated  Jewish  authors,  as  Maimonides,  where 
an  un-Hebrew  form  has  been  fully  adopted  in  English  literature. 

East  Indian  names  have  such  long-accepted  forms  that  it  might  well  be  doubted 
whether  it  will  do  to  use  any  others.  Cashmere,  Mooltan,  Jellaleddin,  Punjaub, 
have  taken  their  places  in  literature  and  in  the  popular  mind.  Nevertheless,  as 
the  better  system  which  writes  Kashmir,  Multan,  Jalal  ud  Din,  Punjab,  is  now 
adopted  in  most  histories,  in  all  official  documents,  among  others  in  Hunter's  great 
statistical  dictionary  of  Bengal,  it  is  evident  that  it  is  the  coming  method,  and,  in 
accordance  with  the  principles  already  laid  down,  we  are  inclined  to  recommend 
this  spelling  rather  than  the  clumsy  English  fashion  of  the  last  generation. 

All  other  Asiatic  and  African  names  should  be  transliterated  according  to  the 
rules  of  the  Royal  Geographical  Society,  which  we  quote  here  from  their  Proceed- 
ings for  August,  i88s  (p.  535,  536). 

The  Council  of  the  Royal  Geographical  Society  have  adopted  the  following  rules 
for  such  geographical  names  as  are  not,  in  the  countries  to  which  they  belong, 
written  in  the  roman  character.  These  rules  are  identical  with  those  adopted  for 
the  Admiralty  charts,  and  will  henceforth  be  used  in  all  publications  of  the  society : — 

1  No  change  ^^'ill  be  made  in  the  orthography  of  foreign  names  in  countries 
which  use  roman  letters:  thus,  Spanish,  Portuguese,  Dutch,  etc.  names  will  be 
spelled  as  by  the  respective  nations. 

2  Neither  will  any  change  be  made  in  the  spelling  of  such  names  in  languages 
which  are  not  written  in  roman  characters  as  have  become  by  long  usage  familiar 
to  English  readers:  thus,  Calcutta,  Cutch,  Celebes,  Mecca,  etc.  will  be  retained  in 
their  present  form. 

3  The  true  sound  of  the  word,  as  locally  pronounced,  will  be  taken  as  the  basis 
of  the  sf)elling. 

4  An  approximation,  however,  to  the  sound  is  alone  aimed  at.  A  system  which 
would  attempt  to  represent  the  more  delicate  inflections  of  sound  and  accent 
would  be  so  complicated  as  only  to  defeat  itself. 

5  The  broad  features  of  the  system  are,  that  vowels  are  pronounced  as  in  Italian 
and  consonants  as  in  English. 

6  One  accent  only  is  used  —  the  acute  —  to  denote  the  syllable  on  which  stress 
is  laid. 

7  Every  letter  is  pronounced.  When  two  vowels  come  together  each  one  is 
sounded,  though  the  result,  when  spoken  quickly,  is  sometimes  scarcely  to  be  dis- 
tinguished from  a  single  sound,  as  in  ai,  au,  ei. 

8  Indian  names  are  accepted  as  spelt  in  Hunter's  Gazetteer. 


REPORT    OF    THE    A.    L.   A.    TRANSLITERATION    COMMITTEE 


67 


The  amplification  of  the  rules  is  given  below: 


Letters 

Pronunciation  and  remarks 

Examf)les 

Letters 

Pronunciation  and  remarks 

Examples 

a 

ah,  a  as  in  father 

Java,  liandna 

j 

English  j.    Dj  should  never 

c 

eh,  e  as  in  benefit 

Tel-el- KeWr. 

be  put  for  this  sound 

Japan,  Jinchuen 

Oleleh,    Yezo, 

k 

English  k.     It  should  always 

Medina,      Le- 

be  put  for  the  hard  c. 

viika,  Peru 

Thi*s,    not    Corea,    but 

Korea 

' 

EnRlish  e;  i  as  in  ravine;  the 
sound  of  ee  in  beet. 

kh 

the  Orients!  guttural 

Khan 

Thus,    not    Feejee,    but 

Fiji,  Hindi 

gh 

is  another  guttural,  as  in  the 

0 

0  as  in  mole 

Tokio 

Turkish 

Dagh,  Ghazi 

u 

ionir  u,  as  in  ,flute;  the  sound 

1 

) 

of  00  in  boot. 

m 

/•  as  in  English 

Thus,    not    Zooloo,    but 

Zulu,  Sumatra 

n 

All  vowels  are  shortened  in 

Yarra,      Tanna, 

ng 

has  two  separate  sounds,  the 

sound  by  doubling  the  fol- 
lowing consonant 

Mecca,  Jidda, 
Uonny 

one  hard  as  in  the  English 
word  finger,  the  other  as 

Doubling  of  a  vowel  is  only 

in    singer.     As   these    two 

necessary  where  there  is  a 

sounds  are  rarely  employed 

distinct   repetition   of   the 

in  the  same  locality,  no  at- 

single sound 

Muuliia,  Oosima 

tempt  is   made  to  distin- 
guish between  them 

ai 

English  /  as  in  jfc 

Shanghai 

P 

as  in  English 

au 

ow  as  in  hnw. 

Thus,  not  Foochow,  but 

I'uchau 

q 

should    never    be   employed; 
..    qu  is  given  as  kw 

KwangtUDg 

ao 

is     slightly     different     from 

above 

Macao 

r 

ei 

is  the  sound  of  the  two  Italian 

t 

»- 

vowels,   but   is   frequently 

V 

as  in  English 

slurred    over,    when    it    is 
scarcely  to  be  distinguished 

w 

X 

Sawdlciu 

from  ey  in  the  English  they 

Beirut,  Reilu 

y 

is  always  a  consonant,  as  in 
yard,  and  therefore  should 

b 

English  b 

never  be  used  as  a  terminal, 

c 

is    always    soft,    but    is    so 
nearly  the  sound  of  s  that 

i  or  e  being  substituted. 
Thus,     not     Mikinddny 

it  should  be  seldom  used. 

Celebes 

but 

Mikinddni 

(If  Celebes  were  not  already 

not  Kwaiy,  but 

recognized     it     would     be 

Kwale 

written  Selehes) 

7. 

English  s 

Zulu 

ch 

is  always  soft  as  in  church 

Chingchin 

.Accents  should  not  generally 
be  used,  but  when  there  is 

d 

English  d 

a   very   decided   emphatic 

£ 

English  /.      ph    should    not 

syllable    or    stress,    which 

be  used  for  the  sound  of  /. 

affects    the   sound    of   the 

Tongatdbu,  G»- 

Thus,  not  Haiphong,  but 

H.iifong,  Nafa 

word,  it  should  be  marked 
by  an  acute  accent 

Idpagos,    Pali- 
wan,  Sariwak 

g 

is   always   hard.     (Soft   g   is 
given  hy  j) 

G:ilapagos 

h 

is  always   pronounced   when 
inserted 

A  few  points  need  to  be  emphasized.  Of  course  the  consonantal  sound  in  itch 
should  never  be  expressed  in  transliteration  by  the  PoUsh  cz,  nor  by  the  German 
tsch.  Teh  has  been  much  used  for  this  sound;  but  the  t  is  hardly  necessary  if,  as 
the  Geographical  Society  recommend,  ch  is  always  used  ^vith  this  sound  only  and 
never  with  the  sound  sh.  Of  course  there  is  no  reason  why  ch  should  be  used  in 
foreign  names  with  the  sound  sh  any  more  than  j  with  the  sound  zh.  All  that  was 
needed  to  prevent  ambiguity  was  for  some  competent  authority  to  make  a  rule; 
and  these  rules  of  the  Geographical  Society  will  no  doubt  soon  be  copied  into  all 
manuals  and  followed  by  the  majority.  In  this  connection  we  express  our  regret 
that  a  new  edition  of  Dr.  Thomas's  excellent  Dictionary  of  Biography  continues  to 
give  his  support  to  what  we  believe  is  an  obsolescent  system  of  transliteration. 

Nor  should  the  consonantal  sound  in  jtuige  be  rendered  by  the  English  dgj  nor 
the  French  dj,  nor  the  German  dsch,  but  by  /  alone.     Likewise  the  consonantal 


68  APPENDIX     2 

sound  in  5//^  is  not  to  be  written  after  the  French  style,  ch,  nor  as  the  Germans  do, 
sch.  The  sound  which  the  French  transliterate  by  7  we  must  express  by  zh  {e.  g. 
Nizhni  Novgorod).  Tz  is  best  used  in  Semitic  and  Slavic  names,  and  ts  in 
Japanese  and  Chinese.  For  the  Semitic  "yod"  y  is  the  proper  equivalent,  and 
not  the  German  J.  But  after  a  consonant  in  the  same  syllable  it  is  usual  to  change 
the  y  to  i  (Biela  not  Byela),  and  in  Russian  names  at,  ei,  oi,  ui  are  used  instead  of 
ay,  ey,  oy,  uy  (Alexei  not  Alexey).  After  /  the  y  is  dropped  (Dobni  not  Dobniy). 
W  is  to  be  used  rather  than  i  in  Arabic  names  (e.  g.  Moawiyah).  But  the  Russian, 
Serb,  Bulgarian,  and  Wallach  contain  no  such  sound  or  letter  as  w,  and  we  must 
write  Paskevitch,  Vasili,  not  as  do  the  Germans,  Paskewitch,  Wasili.  In  the  last 
syllable  of  names  of  places  (Azov,  Kiev)  ev  and  ov  are  to  be  used,  because  the 
Russians  use  the  corresponding  letter,  though  they  pronounce  ef  and  of  (in  the 
nominative  cases).  But  in  the  last  syllable  of  family  names,  similarly  pronounced, 
of  and  ef  may  be  used,  because  the  Russians  sign  their  names  off  and  eff  when 
using  roman  characters.  The  last  /,  which  they  use,  may  be  omitted  as  being 
plainly  not  required  to  express  the  sound,  and  not  corresponding  to  the  Russian 
character.  Kh  represents  the  full  guttural,  which  the  Germans  make  ch  and  the 
Spanish  y  in  Slavic  and  Oriental  names.  H  answers  to  the  softer  guttural  as  well 
as  to  the  Hebrew  he.    K  answers  to  the  Semitic  kaph  and  koph. 

The  use  of  ei  for  the  sound  of  a  in  fate,  ea  in  great,  at  in  trait,  is  not  altogether 
satisfactory.  It  is  not  easy  to  see  why  e  was  not  used  to  represent  this  sound,  and 
the  short  e,  like  the  short  a,  i,  0,  and  u,  indicated  by  doubling  the  following  con- 
sonant, as  Yeddo,  Meddina. 

The  general  rule,  then,  is  to  use  the  consonants  with  their  English  value,  the 
vowels  with  their  continental,  or,  to  speak  more  exactly,  their  German  and  Italian 
value,  for  the  French  value  of  u  should  never  be  used,  and  the  short  French  a 
requires  of  us  a  doubled  consonant  after  it.  Their  ou  and  our  00  is  quite  unneces- 
sary to  express  the  sound  of  the  last  syllable  of  Timbuctu  or  Khartum. 

C:  A.  Cutter 

C.  B.  TiLLINGHAST 

W:  C.  Lane 
Michael  Heilprin 


REPORT    OF    THE   A.    L.    A.    TRANSLITERATION    COMMITTEE  69 


Semitic  transliteration  * 


Arabi 

Hebrew 

Syriac 

Ethiopio 

English 

f 

K 

1 

A 

y^ 

3 

a 

a 

b 

0 

n 

2. 

t 

t 

0 

>» 

>» 

t  (th  in  thin) 

^0) 

Ji(g) 

•^(g) 

''(g) 

j  in  Arabic,  elsewhere  g 

c 

/h 

h 

t 

n 

4* 

t 

h 

0 

1 

? 

fi> 

d 

6 

» 

» 

d  (th  in  this) 

; 

n 

-i 

t 

r 

) 

r 

1 

H 

z 

0- 

D 

tt 

A 

8 
8 

A 

tr' 

^ 

i>» 

s(sh) 

V/» 

V(p 

^l 

R 

8 

U^ 

0 

d 

id 

D 

4 

m 

t 

ib 

? 

£ 

J^ 

^ 

d 

« 

d 

? 

0 

£3(fl) 

a 

A  (f )  T  (p) 

f  (Hebrew  and  Syriac 
porf) 

0 

P 

£ 

♦ 

k  or  q 

J 

Dq) 

^ 

h 

k 

J 

«? 

% 

A 

1 

r 

D(D) 

>o 

m> 

m 

u 

J(p 

\ 

» 

n 

li 

n 

OL 

U 

h 

y 

1 

e 

w 

w 

v5 

♦ 

^ 

f 

1 

*  Table  furnished  to  the  Committee  by  Prof.  C.  H.  Toy  of  Harvard  University. 
For  the  transliteration  of  Hebrew  and  Arabic,  use  the  system  indicated  in  the  Jewish 
Encyclopaedia  v.  2,  N.  Y.,  1902,  p.  ix-x. 


70 


APPENDIX    2 


Sanskrit.     Sundard  system  of  transliteration  * 


Vowels 

1 

Consonants 

nitial 

Non- 
initial 

surd 

surd 
aspirate 

sonant 

sonant 
.aspirate 

nasal 

5r 

* 

a 

^ 

i5r 

JT 

^ 

3 

gutturals  1 

w 

T 

a 

k 

kh 

Cf 

gti 

u 

K 

f 

i 

k 

1 

i 

^ 

5 

jT 

^ 

oT 

palatals  2 

c 

ch 

j 

jll 

fi 

s 

O 

u 

^ 

«^ 

u 

M 

c 

r 

z 

6 

J 

5 

m 

Unguals  3 

t 

th 

d 

dh 

n 

% 

't. 

r 

^ 

<5 

1 

7\ 

5T 

K 

^-f 

5T 

dentals  4 

7 

•~v 

e 

I 

th 

d 

dh 

n 

\ 

^V 

ai 

m 

> 

0 

1 

^ 

^ 

>r 

JT 

labials  5 

^ 

t 

au 

P 

ph 

b 

bh 

m 

♦  Unless 

some  other  non- 

initial    Towel    is 

written. 

^ 

^ 

FT 

^ 

short  a  is 

always 

implied. 

semi- 

y 

r 

1 

V 

vowels 

ST 

q- 

fr 

^ 

three  sibi- 
lants and 

y 

8 

s 

h 

aspiration 

*  Table  furnished  to  the  Committee  by  Prof.  C  R.  Lanman  of  Harvard  University. 


REPORT    OF    THE    A.    L.   A.   TRANSLITERATION    COMMITTEE  7 1 

Professor  Lanman  remarks  on  his  table: 

1  It  will  be  observed  that  each  of  the  five  rows  numbered  i  to  5  consists  of  five 
letters;  the  second  and  fourth  in  each,  i.  e.  the  aspirates,  are  often  written,  espe- 
cially in  older  works,  thus,  k',  g\  c',j\  (,  d\  t',  d',  p\  b';  that  is,  the  rough  breathing 
takes  the  place  of  the  h. 

2  Write  long  vowels  with  a  macron,  thus,  a,  i,  «,  f,  and  not  with  a  circumflex. 

3  Wherever  you  find  the  combination  t:i,  with  a  dot  under  the  r,  reduce  it  to 
simple  r,  since  it  is  a  simple  unitary  sound. 

4  The  palatals  (row  2)  are  often  written  by  means  of  the  gutturals  and  an 
accent:  thus,  we  find  k'  k'h  g'  g'h  for  c  ch  j  jh,  and  in  some  German 
books  c  (which  has  the  sound  of  ch  in  church)  is  written  tsch,  and  j  ( =j  in  judge) 
in  like  manner  dsch.  Further,  c  and  ch  are  written  in  some  English  works  as  ch 
and  cch,  a  useless  waste  of  labor, 

5  When  the  third  palatal  is  written  by  g,  it  is  common  among  the  Germans  to 
write  the  first  semi- vowel  by  j.  The  last  semi- vowel  is  often  written  w  (instead 
of  v). 

6  The  transliteration  of  the  first  two  sibilants  is  very  fluctuating.  My  q  is 
written  s  by  Monier  Williams  in  his  dictionary. 

The  second  sibilant  is  often  written  sh,  sometimes  s,  by  me  as  s,  like  the  other 
Unguals, 

7  Finally  an  5  at  the  end  of  a  Sanskrit  word  is  converted  into  an  aspiration 
called  visarga,  and  written  thus  : ,  and  in  transliteration  is  written  in  this  manner, 
h.  The  nasality  of  a  vowel  is  marked  by  »  or  w  which  appears  in  the  Sanskrit  as  a 
dot  above  the  body  of  the  consonant. 

For  a  brief  and  lucid  discussion  of  these  matters  and  a  defense  of  the  system  of 
Professor  Whitney,  of  Yale,  which  is  followed  in  his  grammar  and  in  Lanman's 
reader,  see  the  Proceedings  of  the  American  Oriental  Society,  October,  1880, 
p,  xvii  (reprinted  in  its  Journal,  vol,  11,  p.  li-liv). 


V 


APPENDIX    2 


REPORT  OP  A.  L.  A.   COMMITTEE  ON  TRANSLITERATION 
OF  SLAVIC  LANGUAGES 

Presented  at  the  Montreal  meeting  of  the  American  Library  Association,  June  ii,  1900. 

The  committee  appointed  by  the  American  Library  Association  to  propose  a 
scheme  for  the  transliteration  of  the  Slavic  alphabets,  after  having  examined  the 
systems  in  use  in  the  principal  libraries  and  scientific  periodicals,  ofifers  the  fol- 
lowing as  the  result  of  its  labors.  It  seems  at  present  impossible  to  offer  a  strictly 
scientific  scheme;  recognition  must  be  made  of  custom  prevalent  in  the  large 
libraries  of  this  country  and  Europe.  The  committee  has  taken  for  a  base  the 
Latin  alphabet  of  the  Croatians  with  some  variations,  and  the  substitution  of 
i  for  j.  Alternatives  are  suggested  for  use  in  any  libraries  which  deem  it  inad- 
visable to  employ  special  accented  characters. 

S.  A.  Chevalier,  Chairman  1 
ARcmBALD  Gary  Coolidge  r  Committee 
A.  V.  Babine  J 


Slavic  Transliteration 


A 

= 

A 

B 

=> 

B 

B 

= 

V 

r 

= 

G* 

A 

= 

D 

E 

= 

E 

HC 

=  Zt,Zh 

3 

= 

Z 

H 

= 

I 

I 

s 

I 

Vi 

» 

T 

K 

= 

K 

Ji 

=: 

L 

M 

» 

M 

H 

= 

N 

0 

= 

0 

n 

= 

P 

p 

=- 

R 

c 

= 

S 

Serbo-Croatian 

T    =        T 

J    =  J.I 

y  =      u 

B    =   Dz,  Dzh 

<D   =        F 

n"   =  C 

X    =  Ht,  Kh 

^    =  Dj,  Di 

U    =  Ct.  Ts 

jb  =  Lj,  Li 

q    =  Ct,  Teh 

lb  =  Nj,  Ni 

ffl  =  §t,  Sh 

m=  §ct,  Shtch 

Old    Bulgarian 

Ij    =  disregard 

after  Leskien, 

H  =  Y 

Handbuch.  ..2.auf- 

b    =  '  or  '  or  disregard 

lage,  1886,  allowing 

-B   =  le,  E 

variants  according 

3    =  E 

to    the     preceding 

K)  =  lu, U 

scheme,    and   sub- 

fl  =  la 

stituting  i  for  Ger- 

e   =  F,  Th 

man  j 

V   =  Y 

*  In  foreign  names,  instead  of  G  for  r,  follow  the  original  spelling. 

t  The  characters  Z,  H,  C,  C,  and  §  represent  the  Serbo-Croatian  method  of  transliterating 
3K,  X,  U,  H,  and  III.  For  English-speaking  people  we  should  undoubtedly  prefer  Zh,  Kh,  Ts, 
Teh,  and  Sh. 


A 

a 

a 

B 

6 

b 

B 

B 

V 

r 

r 

i 

A 

A 

d 

E 

e 

e 

3K 

ac 

zh 

3 

3 

z 

H 

n 

i 

I    i 

i 

Pla 

i 

K  K 

k 

JI  A 

I 

Mm 

m 

Hh 

n 

0  o 

0 

n  n 

P 

p  p 

r 

0    c 

« 

T      T 

« 

y  y 

u 

<D   $ 

/ 

X    X 

kh 

^  ^ 

ts 

^  H 

ch 

lUiu 

sh 

mrn 

shch 

TRANSLITERATION    OF    RUSSIAN    AND    MODERN    GREEK  73 

Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rules  io-ii 
Russian  transliteration* 

riii»l,  dhn- 
T>    Tj  »»rd»d. 

In  middle." 

£1  bi    y 
h   b      ' 

K)k)    ib 

e  e    / 
V  V    y 

ATo/e.  Russian  transliterated  forms  of  foreign  names  (more  particularly  those  of  Western 
European  origin)  are  not  to  be  retransliterated  in  accordance  with  this  rule,  but  are  to  bo 
given  in  the  original  form. 

Hertzen,  not  Gertsen, 
Rubinstein,  not  Rubinshtein. 

Modem  Greek  transliteration  t 

A,  a  =  A,  a  K,  k  =  K,  k  'P,  ^  =  Rh,  rh  (see  note) 

B,  j8  =  B,  b  (see  note)  A,  X  =  L,  1  S,  o-  =  S,  s 
r,  7  =  G,  g  ^X  x' ='")"  M,/x  =  M,  m  T,  r  =  T,  t 
A,  5  =  D,  d             ^  N,  »/  =  N,  n  T,  u  =  Y,  y 
E,  €  =  E,  e  S,  ^  =  X,  X  $,  0  =  Ph,  ph 

Z,  f  =  Z,  z  0,  0  =  O,  o  X,  X  =  Ch,  ch  (see  note) 

H,ij  =  E,  e  (see  note)  11,  Tr  =  P,  p  (see  note)  ^,^  =  Ps,  ps 

e,e  =  Th,  th  P,  p  =  R,  r  12,  co  =  0,  o 
I,  t  =  I,  i 

At,  at  =  Ai,  ai  Ai),  av  =  Ay,  ay  Hv,  rjv  =  Eu,  6u 

Av,av  =  Au,  au  Eu,  eu  =  Eu,  eu  Ov,  ou  =  Ou,  ou 
Spiritus  asper  (")  =  h;  e.  g.  'Era/pia  =  Hetairia. 

Note.  Certain  exceptions  are  reserved.  Names  of  Greek  writers  who  have  published 
books  in  any  of  the  western  European  languages  and  are  better  known  under  a  form  of  name 
transliterated  differently  may  be  given  in  that  form.  The  exceptions  involve  chiefly  the 
transliteration  of  the  following  letters: 

1  B,  /3  transliterated  by  V,  v.  4  H,  -j  transliterated  by  I,  i. 

2  "P  ^  transliterated  by  R,  r  only.  5  t  (after  n)  transliterated  by  b. 

3  X,  X  transliterated  by  H,  h. 

e.  g.  BXAxos  =  Vlachos;  'PayKofirji  =  Rankabes  (Rangabe);  XapaK&ftinis  =  Haralambis. 


*  Rule  10,  printed  Jan.  26,  1905. 
1"  Rule  II,  printed  Jan.  26,  1905. 


APPENDIX  3 
SAMPLE   CARDS 

A  few  typical  examples  are  given  here  to  show  possible  variations  in  style 
and  arrangement  of  matter,  both  of  printed  and  of  type-written  (or  manuscript) 
cards.  In  the  examples  indicated  by  an  asterisk  the  printed  part  of  the  card  is 
in  the  form  used  by  the  Library  of  Congress,  and  is  the  form  which  the  Com- 
mittee practically  recommends,  in  order  to  secure  as  great  a  degree  of  uniformity 
as  possible.  Examples  illustrating  any  given  rule  have  been  inserted  in  the 
body  of  the  work,  immediately  after  the  rule  concerned. 

MAIN  ENTRY  CARDS 

Note  variations  in  typography  of  heading  and  collation,  also  position  of  collation,  series 
note,  shelf  mark,  and  first  word  of  title.  The  second  sample  illustrates  the  bracketing  of 
'forenames  when  the  form  of  name  as  given  on  the  title-page  of  the  book  is  not  quoted  on  the 
card. 


Maynadier,  Gustavus  Howard,  1866-  12482. 1 1.5 

The   wife   of    Bath's   tale ;    its-  sources  and  analogues,  by 
G.  H.  Maynadier  ...     London,  D.  Nutt,  1901. 

xii,  222  p.     diagr.     20'='".     { A'a^-////^ ;  Grimm  library.     lio.  13) 


12482. 11.5  Majmadier,  G[UStavus]  H[Oward]  The  wife  of  Bath's  tale; 
its  sources  and  analogues.  London,  D.  Nutty  1901.  xii,  222  p. 
diagr.     20'='".  (Grimm  library,  13) 


Ju83  Johnston,  Alexander. 

^^^  American  political  history,  1763- 

1876...  Ed.  and  supplemented  by 
J.  A.  Woodburn...  Pt.  1.  N.Y. , 
Putnam,  1905.   22' 


)cm 


*  Library  of  Congress  card  with  addition  of  a  call-number 


76  APPENDIX  3 

TWO   EDITIONS  ON   ONE  CARD 


823  [Burton,     Robert]       The    anatomy     of    melancholy.       By 

B95.4  Democritus  Junior  \pseud.\  4th  ed.,  cor.  and  augm.  by  the 
author.     Oxford,  printed  for  Henry  Cripps,  1632. 

5  p.  L,  78.  [6j,  722,  [loj  p.    29=». 

Engr.  t.-p. 

823  The  same.     5th   ed.,  cor.  and  augm.  by  the  author. 

B95.5       Oxford,  printed  for  Henry  Cripps,  1638. 

5  p.  1..  78.  (2),  723.  ['OJ  P-    29='"- 
Engr  t.-p. 


823  [Burton,     Robert]       The    anatomy    of     melancholy.       By 

B95.4       Democritus   Junior    \pseitd.\     4th  ed.,  cor.  and  augm.  by  the 
author.     Oxford,  printed  for  Henry  Cripps,  1632. 
5  p.  l,  78,  [6],  722,  (10)  p.    29<:™. 

Engr.  t.p. 

823  5th    ed.,    cor.    and    augm.    by    the    author. 

B95.5       Oxford,  printed  for  Henry  Cripps,  1638. 

5  p.  l,  78,  12),  723,  [10]  p.     29^™. 
Engr.  t.-p. 

REFERENCE  CARDS 
Note  variations  in  position  of  heading  and  the  word  iee. 


''     Crayon,  Geoffrey,  pseud. 

see 
Irving,  Washington,  1783-1859. 


Crayon,  Geoffrey,  pseud.       see 
Irving,  Washington. 


SAMPLE  CARDS  77 


Evcms,  Marian. 

See  Eliot,  George,  pseud,  of 
Marian  Evans,  afterwards 
Mrs,  Cross,  1819-1880. 


Thomson,  William,  1st  baron  Kelvin. 
See  Kelvin,  William  Thomson,  1st  baron, 1824- 
1908. 


Thomson,  William,  1st  baron  Kelvin, 
See  Kelvin. 


TITLE   REFERENCE  CARDS 

The  call  nnmbers  refer  to  different  editions 


Chronicles  of  Barsetshire. 
Trollope,  Anthony. 

For  contents  see  anthor  card. 


12566.13.2  Cyrano  de  Bergerac.   [English  trans- 
12566.14  lation] 

See  Rostand,  Edmond. 


12566,13.2  Cyrano  de  Bergerao.  [English  trans 
12566,14       lation]  By  Edmond  Rostand, 

For  further  particulars  see  author  card. 


78  APPENDIX  3 

ADDED  ENTRY  CARDS 

The  second  and  fourth  examples  show  the  method  of  nsing  printed  cards. 
See  also  Library  of  Congress  Handbook  of  card  distribution 


Shoberl,  Frederic,  1775-1853,   tr, 

843   Hugo,  Victor  Marie,  comte,  1802-1885. 
H86h     The  hunchback  of  Notre-Dame.   1833. 

For  fuller  entry  see  under  author's 
name. 


Shoberl,  Frederic,  1775-1853,   tr. 

Hugo,  Victor  Marie,  comte,  1802-188 5.  843.H86h 

The  hunchback  of  Notre-Dame.  By  Victor  Hugo.  Tr. 
expressly  for  this  ed.,  with  a  sketch  of  the  life  and  writings  of 
the  author :  by  Frederic  Shoberl.  London,  R.  Bentley  ;  (etc., 
etc.  J  1833. 

3  p.  1.,  (V]-xiv,  466  p.    front.     lej'™.    (Added t. -p.:  Standard  novels,  no.  32) 
Added  t-p.,  engr. 


808   Kittredge,  George  Lyman,  joint  author. 

^1^      Manual  of  composition  and  rhetoric, 
by  J.  H.  Gardiner. . .G.  L.  Kittredge... 
anvi  Sarah  L.  Arnold...  ['1907] 


f 


Thunder  and  lightning. 
QC966     Flammarion,  Camille  i.  e.  Nicolas  Camille,  1842- 

^  ■^irT^""^^''   ^"^   ^'ghtning,    by    Camille   Flammarion.     Tr.    by 

Walter  Mostyn  Boston,  Little,  Brown,  and  company,  1906. 

3  p.  1.,  281  p.,  I  1.    front.     I9j"». 


I.     Mostyn,  Walter,  tr. 


♦  Library  of  Congress  cards  with  addition  of  call-numbers  and  type-written  headings. 


SAMPLE  CARDS  79 

AUTHOR  ANALYTICAL  CARDS 

The  first  three  examples  illustrate  the  usual  forms  of  analytical  entries,  while  the  last  three 
show  how  printed  main  entry  cards  may  be  used  for  analytical. 


AS36       Wallace,  Charles  William. 

^^w)  . . .  The  newly-discovered  Shakespeare  documents,  by  Charles 

William  Wallace. 

{In  Nebraska.    University.    University  studies.    Lincoln,  1905.    23cm. 
vol.  V,  no.  4,  p.  347-356) 


AS36  Wallace,  Charles  William.    The  nevvly-discovered  Shakespeare 

N2  documents.     (/«  Nebraska — Univ.     University  studies,  1905, 

(V0I.5)     5:347-356) 


AS36  Wallace,  Charles  William. 

^^  ..."  The  newly-discovered  Shakespeare 

"^•^  documents.    (In  Nebraska. University. 

University  studies.   1905.   v.  5,  p.  347- 
356) 


[ister,  Owen,  1860- 

813        Stories  of\he  colleges ;  being  tales  of  life  at  the  great  Ameri- 
St55  ^^^    universities  told   by  noted    graduates.     Philadelphia   & 

London,  J.  Bw  Lippincott  company,  1901. 

353  P-    »9r 

Contents.  —  Harvar(!\ Philosophy  4.  by  O.  Wister.  —  Vale :  A  bachelor  of 
arts,  by  R.  Holbrook.  —  Princeton  •  Kah.  rah,  rah,  Murray,  by  B.  E.  Stevenson. 
—  Pennsylvania  :  Smith  of  "  Pennsylvania,"  by  F.  C  Williams.  —  Columbia  :  A 
lightning  change,  by  A.  P.  Terhune.  —  West  Point .  The  code  of  the  corps,  by 
General  C  King.  —  Annapolis.  A  hazing  interregnum,  by  C.  T.  Brady.  —  Cor- 
nell :  The  personal  equation,  by  J  G  Sanderson.  —  Chicago  :  The  head  marshal 
of  the  University  of  Chicago,  by  J.  W   Linn. 


*  Library  of  Congress  cards  with  addition  of  call-number  and  type-written  heading. 


8o  APPENDIX  3 


Woods,  Robert  Archey,  1865- 

The  university  settlement   idea. 

Philanthropy  and  social  progress ;  seven  essays  .  .  .  delivered 
before  the  School  of  applied  ethics  at  Plymouth,  Mass.,  during 
the  session  of  1892.  With  introduction  by  Professor  Henry  C. 
Adams.     New  York,  Boston,  T.  Y.  Crowell  &  company  1I893] 

xi,  268  p.     19J'™. 

Contents. — The  subjective  necessity  for  social  settlements.  By  Miss  Jane 
Addams.  —  The  objective  value  of  a  social  settlement.  By  Miss  Jane  Addams. — 
The  nniversity  settlement  idea.  By  R.  A.  Woods.  —  Philantbropy,  its  success 
and  failure.  By  Father  J.  O.  S.  Huntington.  —  Philanthropy  and  morality.  By 
Father  J.  O.  S.  Huntington. — The  ethics  of  social  progress.  By  Prof.  F.  H. 
Giddings.  —  The  principles  and  chief  dangers  of  the  administration  of  charity. 
By  B.  Bosanquet. 

1.  Addams,  Jane,  i860-  IL  Woods,  Robert  Archey,  1865-  in.  Hunt- 

ingdon, James  Otis  Sargent    iv.  Giddings,  Franklin  Henry,  1855-  v.  Bos- 

anquet, Bernard,  1848- 


unes,  Gregorio,  1749-1830. 

XJ.  S7  President,    1817-182$    {Monroe)         . . .   Message   from 
tl^  President  .. .     18 18     (Card  g) 


Tne  reports  of  T.  Bland,  the  third  member  of  the  commission,  together  with 
other  documents  concerning  South  American  affairs,  are  issued  as  House  doc  48, 
ifty  Cong.,  2d  sess. 

'  Historical  sketch  of  the  revolution  of  the  United  Provinces  of  South  America 
from  the  25th  of  May,  1810,  until  the  opening  of  the  National  congress,  on  the 
25th  of  March,  1816,  written  by  Dr.  Gregorio  Funes":  p.  46-96. 

(15th  Cong.,    2d  sess.     House  doc     2; 
no.   17  of  Congressional  series) 

I.  Rodney,  Caesar  Augustus,  1 772-1 824.  11.  Graham,  John,  1 774-1 820. 
llL   Funes,  Gregorio,  1749-18JO. 

The  above  example  shows  the  method  of  unng  the  second  card  only  for  an  analytical,  when 
the  main  entry  fills  more  than  one  card. 

TITLE  ANALYTICAL  CARD 

Philosophy  4. 

813       Wister,    Owen,    1860-  (In  Stories  of 

St55  the   colleges.      1901.     p.   1-73) 


*  Library  of  Congress  card  with  addition  of  type-written  headings 


INDEX 


Bold-face  figures  indicate  rules 


Abbeys,  97 

Abbreviations  (Appendix  l)  p.  62-64 

Academic  dissertations,  3 

defined,  p.  xiv 
Academies,  learned,  78 
Accents,  173 
Added  entries,  169 

defined,  p.  xiii 
Admiralty  proceedings,  134 
Affiliated  institutions,  p.  25,  foot-note.    See 
also  84,  note 

societies,  79 
African  names,  transliteration,  p.  66-67 
Agricultural  experiment  stations  (U.  S.),  92 

societies,  American  state,  72,  note 
Almanacs,  123 

Alternative  title,  capitalization  (L.  C.  rule) 
P-  57,  a       , 

defined,  p.  xiii 
Alumni  associations,  75 
American  state  institutions,  91 

state  societies,  72,  note 
Analytical  entries,  170 

defined,  p.  xiii 
Annual  reports  of  government  departments, 
bureaus,  etc.,  58-59 

of  societies  or  institutions,  121,  If  3 
Annuals,  121,  123,  125 
Anonymous,  defined,  p.  xiii 

manuscripts,  22:  2 

titles,    capitalization,    172;    L.    C.    rule, 
p.  ST ,  foot-note 

works,  112-118 

author  known,  112 

"by  the  author  of,"  114 

change  of  title  in  successi\e  volumes, 

"3 

different  spelling  of  first  word  of  title. 

116 
initials,  asterisks,  etc.  used  in  place  of 

author's  name,  115 
related  works,  117 
translations,  118 
Arabic  names,  transliteration,  p.  6i),  foot-note 

Writers,  52 
Archbishops.  34.     Sec  also  iS,  foot-note 
Architects,  7 
Armenian  names,  55 
Art  galleries,  82-83 

Asiatic  names,  transliteration,  p.  66-67 
Associations,  72—81 


Asylums,  82—83;  9i  (American  state  institu- 
tions) 
Atlases,  165 
Author,  defined,  p.  xiii 
Author  entry,  i 

defined,  p.  xiii 
Authors,  corporate,  58-11 1 

defined,  p.  xiii,  Author:  2 
Authors,  joint,  2 

defined,  p.  xv 

Banks,  98 

Bastard  title,  defined,  see  Half-title,  p.  xiv 

Bazaars,  102-103 

Benevolent  and  moral  societies,  72,  note 

Bible,  119 

characters,  47 
Binder's  title,  defined,  p.  xiii 
Bishops,  34.    See  also  3$,  foot-note 
Boards  of  trade,  82 
Boards,  trustees,  etc.,  108 
Bodies,  entry  of,  see  Corporate  entry- 
names  of,  capitalization,  172;  L.  C  rules, 
p.  58,  m,  59,  o 
Books,  privately  printed,  154 

published  without  a  title-page,  147 

with  several  title-pages,  144 
Botanical  gardens,  95 
Brackets,  173 
Breviaries,  80 

(British)  Library  association  rules,  see  Li- 
brary association  rules  (British) 
Buildings,  82-83 

names  of,  capitaliziition  (L.  C  rules)  p.  59. 
n,  o;  p.  58,  g  :3 
Bulls,  papal,  12 

Bureaus  or  offices  siii)ordinate  to  a  depart- 
ment, 59 
By-names,  capitalization  (L.C.rulei  p.  58, j 

choice  between   by-name   and    forename 
as  entr>-  word,  31,  foot-note 

to  be  added  when  forename  becomes  entry- 
word,  36 
Byzantine  writers,  50 

Cantatas,  8 
Capitals,  172 

Library  of  Congress  rules,  p.  57-59 
adjectives  derived  from  names  of  per- 
sons, p.  58,  i 
adjectives  used  substantively  to  denote 
races  or  peoples,  p.  57,  d 


82 


INDEX 


Capitals,  I,.  C  rules  (conlinued, 
alternative  title,  p.  57,  a 
anonymous  titles,  p.  57,  fool-note 
buildings,  inonuitients,  etc.,  p.  59,  n.  o; 

P-  5«.  g  :  3 

by-names  and  epithets,  p.  58,  j 

collections  entered  under  title,  p.  57,  b 

common  nouns,  p.  59,  r 

events  and  periods,  p.  59,  p 

fanciful  or  arbitrar>-  epithets  in  names 
of  s<x-ieties.  etc.,  p.  59,  o 

geographic  adjectives,  p.  57,g-58 

geographic  names,  p.  57,  e 
substitutes  for,  p.  57,  f 

languages,  names  of,  p.  58,  h 

months,  days  of  the  week,  etc.,  p.  59,  p 

nouns  denoting  partisans  of  sects,  reli- 
gious orders,  jwlitical  parties,  etc., 

P-  59.  P 
periodicals,  titles  of,  p.  57,  a-b 
proper  names,  p.  57,  c 
quoted  titles,  p.  57,  a 
scientific  names  in  zoolog>'  and  botany, 

p-  59.  q 

serials  and   collections  entered   under 

title,  p.  57,  b 
societies  and  other  bodies,  p.  58,  m, 

59.0 
streets,  avenues,  squares,  etc.,  p.  57, 

foot-note 
titles  of  address,  p.  58,  1 

of  honor  and  distinction,  p.  58,  k 
Caption,  defined,  p.  xiii 
Caption  title,  defined,  p.  xiii 
Carnegie  libraries,  99 
Cartographers,  6 

Catalog  (of  books),  defined,  p.  xiii 
Catalogs  of  private  collections,  89 

thematic,  10 
Catechisms,  80 
Chaml)ers  of  commerce,  82 
Change  of  name,  40 
Charges,  decisions,  etc.  of  judges,  66 
Charitable  societies,  72,  note 
Charters,  70 
Chrestomathies.  18 
Chronograms,  174 
Church  conferences,  105 

councib.  104 
Churches,  96 
C"ities,  official   publications  of,  58-61;  62, 

last  note  (ordinances) 
Citizens,  classes  of,  as  authors,  107 
committees  and  meetings  of,  106 


Civil  actions,  132 

Clubs,  72 

Codes  of  law,  62 

Collation,    158-165;   L.   C.   Suppl.   rule,   p. 

51-54  define<l,  p.  xiii 

See  also  Paging;  Illustrations;  Size 
Ollected  ref)orts  of  trials,  135 
Collections,  126 

defined,  p.  xiii 

entered   under  title,  capitalization,   172; 
L.  C.  rule,  p.  57,  b 

of  bulls,  12 

of  engravings,  5 

of  extracts  from  periodicals,  122 

of  inscriptions,  126  :  i 

of  laws,  62 

of  manuscripts,  22 

of  reports  of  trials,  135 

of  reports  to  a  department,  60 

of  treaties,  71 

of  writings  by  different  authors,  with  no 
collective  title,  126  :  3 

private,  89 

published  in  honor  of  a  jwrson  or  to  cele- 
brate an  anniversary,  126  :  2 
College  institutions,  85.     See  also  92  (Agri- 
cultural exi)eriment  stations) 

libraries,  85 

observ'atories,  85,  94 

societies,  76 
Colleges,  82-83 

or  professional  schools  of  a  university,  84 

See  also  Universities 
Colophon,  137 

defined,  p.  xiii 
Commentaries,  13 

Committees  and  meetings  of  citizens,  106 
Compiler,  defined,  p.  xiv 
Comjxisers,  8-10 
Composite  works,  srr  Collections 
Compound  forenames,  30 

name,  defined,  p.  xiv 

surnames,  25 
Concordances,  16 

Conferences,  international,  of  private  per- 
sons, loi ;  of  religious  bodies,  not  limited 
to  one  denomination,  104 

of  so<'ieties,  fwlitical  parties,  religious  de- 
nominations, etc.,  105 
Confessions  of  faith,  80 
Congress«'s,  diplomatic,  100 

international,  of  private  persons,  lOl 
Constitutional  conventions,  69 
Constitutions.  68 


INDEX 


83 


Contents,  167 

in  series  entry,  128 
Continuations,  14 

defined,  p.  xiv 
Conventions,  constitutional,  69 

of  societies,  political  parties,  religious  de- 
nominations, etc.,  105 
Convents,  97 
Copyright   date,    157;    L.    C.    Suppl.    rule, 

p.  49:2 
Corporate  entry,  58-1 11 

defined,  p.  xiv 
Correspondence,  2 
Councils,  ecclesiastical,  104 
Countries,  official  publications  of,  58-71 
Courts,  64-66 
Cover-title,  defined,  p.  xiv 
Creeds,  80 

Crown,  state,  and  criminal  trials,  133 
Cyclopedias,  127 

Dash,  173 

r3ate,  155-157;  L.  C.  Suppl.  rule,  p.  49 

copyright,  157 

defined,  p.  xiv 

wanting,  156 

See  also  174 
Dates  of  birth  and  death,  37 
Days,  names  of,  capitalization  (L.  C.  rule) 

P-  59.  P 
Decisions  of  courts,  66 
Defective  copies,  163;  L.  C.  Suppl.  rule,  p. 

52 :  4,  d.     See  also  147 
Definitions,  p.  xiii-xvi 
Denominations,  religious,  80,  105 
Departments,  bureaus,  etc.,  58-59 
Designations  added  to  names  in  headings, 

35-37 
Designers,  4 

Diagrams  (L.  C.  Suppl.  rule)  p.  53,  Illustra- 
tions: 6 
Dictionaries,  127 
Digests  of  laws,  63 

of  reports,  65 
Diplomatic  congresses,  lOO 
Directories,  125 
Dissertations,  3 

academic,  defined,  p.  xiv 

program,  defined,  p.  xv 
Documents,  government,  58-71 

East  Indian  names,  p.  66 
Hcclesiastical  councils,  104 

dignitaries,  34 

districts,  official  publications  of,  58 


Edition,  148 
defined,  p.  xiv 
different  editions  in  the  same  set,  149 

Editor,  defined,  p.  xiv 

Editors,  names  of,  57 

Egyptian  names,  p.  65 

Encyclopedias,  127 

Endowments,  foundations,  funds,  no 

Engravers,  5 

Engravings,  5 

Entry,  defined,  p.  xiv.  See  also  Added  entry, 
Analytical  entry,  Author  entry,  Cor- 
porate entry.  Main  entry.  Series  entry, 
Title  entry 

Entry  word,  defined,  p.  xiv 

PIpics,  national  folk  tales,  etc.,  120 

F^pithets  to  be  added  in  heading  when  fore- 
name becomes  entry  word,  36 
used  in  place  of  names  of  persons,  capitali- 
zation (L.  C.  rule)  p.  58,  j 

Eipitomes,  17 

Events  and  periods,  names  of,  capitalization 
(L.  C.  rule)  p.  59,  p 

Excerpts,  chrestomathies,  18 

Exclamation  point  used  to  indicate  mis- 
prints or  errors  in  spelling,  138 

Exhibitions,  fairs,  bazaars,  102-103 

Experiment  stations,  agricultural  (U.S.)  92 

Exploring  expeditions,  in 

Expositions,  102-103 

Extracts  from  periodicals,  122 

Facsimile  reprint,  defined,  p.  xv 
Facsimiles  of  manuscripts,  22 
Fairs,  102-103 
l*"amily  names,  see  Surnames 
Festschriften,  126  :  2 
Figures,  174 

in  imprint,  155 
Firms,  109.    See  also  60,  note 
Folio,  defined,  p.  xiv 
Folk  tales,  epics,  etc.,  120 
Forename,  entry  under,  31-32 
Forenames,  comf>ound,  30 

form  of,  27 

German  and  Swedish,  spelling  of,  27 

of  classical  origin,  spelling  of,  27 

unused,  28 

with  variants,  29 
Foundations,  endowments,  funds,  no 
Fraternities,  Greek  letter,  72 
PVecmasons,  74 
Frontispiece  (L.  C.  Suppl.  rule)  p.  52:  3, 

defined,  p.  xiv 
Funds,  endowments,  foundations, -no 


84 


INDEX 


f'.allcrics,  82-83 

calli-tl  ImiK'rial,  Royal,  etc.,  93 

private,  89 
Gcogniphic  headings,  130 

names,  capitalization,   172;  L.   C.  rules, 
p.  57.C.  e,  f 
transliteration,  p.  66-67 
German  forenames,  spelling  of,  27 
Gilds,  77 
Government  departments,  bureaus,  etc.,  58- 

59 

publications,  58-71 
Greek  letter  fraternities,  72 
Greek  names,  modern,  transliteration  (L.  C. 
Suppl.  rule),  p.  73 

writers,  ancient,  49.    See  also  p.  65 
("luilds  see  Gilds 

Half-title,  defined,  p.  xiv 

Head-line,  defined,  p.  xiv 

Heading,  defined,  p.  xiv 

Hebrew  writers,  53.     See  also  p.  66;  p.  69, 

fool-nole 
Heraldic  visitations,  11 

Historical  sotneties,  American  state  72,  note 
Hospitals,  82-83;  91  (American  state  insti- 
tutions) 
college  or  university,  8$ 

Illustrated  works,  4 
Illustrations,  161 

defined,  p.  xv 

Library'  of  Congress  supplementary  rule, 

P-  52-53 
colored,  p.  52:  i 
diagrams  p.  53  Illustrations:  6 
frontispiece,  p.  52:  3 
music,  p.  53:  7 

number  of  plates,  maps,  etc.,  p.  52:  4 
plates,  etc.  included  in  paging,  p.  52:  2 
portraits,  maps,  etc.  in  the  text,  p.  52:  5 
tables  in  the  text,  p.  53  Illustrations:  5 
Illustrators,  4 
Imperfect  copies,   163;  L.  C.  Suppl.  rule, 

p.  52:  4,  d.    See  also  147 
Imp>erial,  Royal,  etc.,  at  the  beginning  of 
names  of  societies,  78 
universities,  galleries,  etc.  called,  93 
Imprint.  150-157 
defined,  p.  xv 
Library-  of  Congress  supplementary-  rule, 

P-  47-49 
books  published  abroad,  p.  47:  2 
books  published  in  the  United  States, 

p.  47:  I 


Imprint,  L.  C".  Suppl.  rule  (continued) 
date,  p.  49 

dissertations,  p.  48:  10 
fictitious  and  imaginary  imprints,  p.  48. 

II 
imprints  without  publisher's  or  printer's 

name,  p.  48:  8 
language  of  imprint,  p.  49:  14 
name  of  state  or  country  after  place  of 

publication,  p.  48:  9 
omission  of  a  place,  p.  47:  4 

of  a  place  and  publisher,  p.  47:  3 
of  a  publisher,  p.  48:  5 
one  place  with  two  or  more  publishers, 

P-48:5 
printer,  p.  48:  8 

privately  printed  books,  p.  49:  13 
public  documents,  p.  48:  7 
two   or    more    places   and    publishers, 

P-  47:3 
two  or  more  places,  publisher  the  same, 

P-  47:4 
two  places  connected  by  and,  etc. .  p.  48 : 6 
variations  in  imprint,  p.  49:  12 
Inaugural  dissertations,  3 
Indexes,  15 

Indian  schools  (U.  S.),  88 
Indie  names,  54 
Initials,    asterisks,    etc.    used    in    place   of 

author's  name,  115 
Inscriptions,  129 

collections  of,  126:  i 
Institutions,  82-99 
aflliliated,  p.  25,  foot-note.  See  also  84,  note 
American  state,  91 
national,  90 

whose  names  begin  w-ith  a  proper  noun  or 
adjective,  83.  See  also  p.  25,  foot-note 
Intercollegiate  societies,  72 
International  meetings,ofprivateperson8,ioi 

s<icieties,  73 
Interrogation  point,  173 
Interview-s,  20 

Jewish  names  see  Names,  Hebrew;  Names, 

Biblical 
Joint  authors,  2 
defined,  p.  xv 
Judges,  opinions,  decisions,  charges  of,  66 
Judicial  districts,  official  publications  of,  58 

K.K.,  R.,  I.,  etc.,  at  the  beginning  of  names 
of  learned  academics,  78 
capitalization  of  following  word  (L.  C. 
rule)  p.  59,  m 


INDEX 


85 


Knighthood,  orders  of,  74 
Knights  templars,  74 
Koran,  119 

Laboratories,  82-B3 

college  or  university,  85 
Lady,  as  title,  35,  nole 
Language  of  book,  140 
Languages,  names  of,  capitalization  (L.  C. 

rule)  p.  58,  h 
Latin  authors,  51 
Latin  form  of  name,  post-reformation  and 

modern  writers  known  under,  44 
Law  digests,  63 

reports,  64 
Laws,  62 
Lawsuits,  132 
Learned  academies,  78 
Legislative  bodies,  58,  62 
Libraries,  82-83 

American  state,  91 

Carnegie,  99 

college  or  university,  85 

mercantile,  82 

national,  90 

Passmore-Edwards,  99 

private,  89 

public,  82-83;  99 
Library  association  rules  (British) 

Anonymous  works  — 

Different  spelling  of  first  word  of  title, 
116 
Translations,  118 

Change  of  name,  40 

Concordances,  16 

Married  women,  41 

Noblemen,  33 

Periodicals,  121 

Princes  of  the  blood,  32 
Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rules: 

Agricultural  experiment  stations,  92 

Atlases,  165 

Collation,  p.  51-54 

Dissertations,  p.  2-4 

(ieographic  headings,  130 

Heraldic  visitations,  11 

Imprint,  p.  47-49 

Indian  schools  (U.  S.),  88 

Monasteries,  abbeys,  convents,  etc.,  97 

Program  dissertations,  p.  3-4 

Series  note,  166 

Thematic  catalogs,  10 

Titles  and  title-pages  in  diflferent   lan- 
guages, 145 


Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rules 
(continued) 
Transliteration,  modern  Greek,  p.  73 

Russian,  p.  73 
Treaties  and   negotiations  with   foreign 
powers,  p.  21 
Librettos,  9 
Liturgies,  80 

Local  branches  of  affiliated  societies,  79 
societies,  72,  note 

Maiden  name,  41 

Main  entry,  defined,  p.  xv 

Manuscripts  and  facsimiles  of  manuscripts, 

22 
Maps,  entry  of,  6 
Married  women,  41 
Masonic  bodies,  74 
Medieval  names,  43 
Meetings,  international,  of  private  persons, 

lOI 

Meetings  of  citizens,  106 

Mercantile  libraries,  82 

Middle  ages,  writers  of  the,  43 

Military  districts,  official  publications  of,  58 

Misprints,  indication  of,  138 

Missals,  80 

Modified  vowels,  131 

Monasteries,  97 

Monograph  supplements  to  periodicals,  121 

Monographs,  collections  of,  126 

Months,   names  of,   capitalization    (L.    C. 

rule)  p.  59,  p 
Municipalities,  official  publications  of,  58-6I 

62,  last  note  (ordinances) 
Museums,  82-83 

college  or  university,  85 
Music,  entry  of,  8 

not  indicated  in  collation  (L.  C.  Suppl. 
rule)  p.  53  :  7 

Name,  change  of,  40 

Names,  African,  transliteration,  p.  66-67 

Arabic,  52 

transliteration,  p.  6g,  foot-note 

Armenian,  55 

Asiatic,  transliteration,  p.  66-67 

Biblical,  47.    See  also  p.  66 

Byzantine,  50 

compound,  25 
defined,  p.  xiv 

East  Indian,  p.  66 

Eg\ptian,  p.  65 

full  names  in  headings,  23 


86 


INDEX 


Narm*s  (continued) 
geographic,  130 

capitalization,  172;  L.  C.  rules,  p.  57,  c, 
f,  f  in  imprint,  150-151 
transliteration,  p.  66-67 
C>reek,  ancient,  49.    See  also  p.  65 

modern,  transliteration  (L.  C.  Siippl. 
rule)  p.  73 
Hebrew,  53.    See  also  p.  66;  p.  6q.  fool-note 
Indie,  54 
Latin,  51 
medieval,  43 
naturalizeil,  26 
Oriental.  52-56 
Persian,  52 
renaissance     and     reformation     periods, 

names  of,  43 
Russian,    transliteration    (L.    C    Suppl. 

rule)  p.  73 
Sanskrit,  transliteration,  p.  70-71 
Semitic,  transliteration,  p.  69 
Slavic,  transliteration,  p.  72-73 
Syriac,  53 
translated,  43 
transliterated,  42 
Turkish,  52 

variations  due  to  language,   translitera- 
tion, etc.,  42 
vernacular  form  of,  23 
National  banks,  98 

institutions,  90 
Naturalized  names,  26 
Newspapers,  124 
Nicknames,  39 
Noblemen,  33 
Notes,  168 

onlcr  of,  p.  56,  foot-note 
Numismatic  cabinets,  89 

Observatories,  94 

college  or  university,  85 
Occupation,  designations  tlenoting,  37 
Official  publications  of  countries,  etc.,  58-71 
Omissions  from  title,  136 
OfKiras,  8 

Opinions,  decisions,  etc.  of  judges,  66 
Oratorios,  8 
Orders  of  knighthood,  74 

religious,  80 

secret,  74 
Ordinances,  city,  62,  last  note 
Oriental  writers,  52-56 

Paging,  159-160 

Library  of  Congress  supplementary  rule 

P-  51 
continuous  paging,  p.  51:  2 


Paging,  L.  C.  Suppl.  rule  (continued) 
cover-title,  p.  51:  8 
leaves,  p.  5 1 :  4-6 
roman  numerals,  p.  51:7 
unnumbered  printed  piiges,  p.  51 :  3 
various  paging,  p.  51:9 
Pamphlets  bound  together,  size  of  (L.  C. 

Suppl.  rule)  p.  53:4 
Papal  bulls,  12 
Parentheses,  173 
Parties,  |X)litical,  81,  105 
Passmore-Edwards  libraries,  99 
Period,  173 
Perio<licals,  I2I 
defined,  p.  xv 
extracts  from,  122 

issued  by  societies  or  institutions,  121,  If  3 
monograph  supplements  to,  121 
titles  of,  capitalization,  172;  L.  C.  rules, 
p.  57.  a-b 
Periods  and  events,  names  of,  capitalization 

(L.  C.  rule)  p.  59,  p 
Persian  writers,  52 

Place  names,  capitalization  (L.  C.  rules)  p. 
57.  c,  e,  f 
in  imprint,  150-151 
used  as  entry  words,  130 
Place  of  printing,  153 

of  publication,  150-151 
Plans,  cntr>'  of   7 

Plates  161.  See  also  L.  C.  Suppl.  rule,  p.  52- 
53:  Illustrations 
defined,  p.  xv 
Pleas,  67 

Political  parties,  81,  105 
Popes,  entn,'  under  forename.  31 

Latin  form  of  name  for,  45 
Post-reformation  and  modern  writers  known 

under  I^atin  form  of  name,  44 
Prayer-books,  80  ^ 

Prefixes,  surnames  with,  26 
Princes  of  the  blood,  32 

ruling,  31 
Printer,  153 

defined,  p.  xv 
Printing,  place  of,  153 
F^riories,  97 

Prisons,  82-83;  9^  (American  state  institu- 
tions) 
Private  collections,  89 

schools,  87 
Privately  printed,  defined,  p.  xv 
Privately  printed  btwks,  154 
Proceedings,  admiralty,  134 
crown,  state  and  criminal,  133 
of  societies  and  institutions.  121,  *!  3 


INDEX 


87 


Profession,  designations  denoting,  37 
Professional  schools  of  a  university,  84 
Program  dissertations  (L.  C.  Suppl.  rulej  p. 

3-4 

defined,  p.  xv 
Proper  names,  capitalization,  172 
Pseudonyms,  38 

defined,  p.  xv 
Public  documents,  58-71 

libraries,  82-83 

Carnegie,  Passmore-Kdwards,  etc.,  99 

schools,  86 
Publication,  ])Iace  of,  150-151 
Publisher,  152 

defined,  see  Printer,  p.  xv 
Punctuation,  173 

Quoted  notes,  168 

titles,  capitalization  (L.  C.  rule)  p.  57,  a 

Rare  books,  collation  of,  162 

place  of  printing  and  printer,  153 

titles  of,  137 
References,  171 

defined,  p.  xv 
Reformation  period,  writers  of  the,  43 
Religious  denominations,  80,  105 

orders,  80 
Renaissance  period,  writers  of  the,  43 
Reporters,  64,  132 
Reports,  law,  64 
digests  of,  65 

of  admiralty  proceedings,  134 

of  civil  actions,  132 

of  committees  of  citizens,  106 

of  crowTi,  state,  and  criminal  trials,  133 

of  government  departments,  etc.,  58-61 

of  socneties  or  institutions,  I2i,  '[  3 

of  trials,  collected,  135 
Reprint,  defined,  p.  xv 

facsimile,  defined,  p.  xv 

with  two  title-pages,  146 
Revisions,  19 
Roman  numerals,  174 

Royal,  Imperial,  etc.,  at  the  beginning  of 
names  of  societies,  78 

universities,  galleries,  etc.  called,  93 
Ruling  princes,  31 
Running  title,  defined,  p.  xvi 
Russian  names,  transliteration  (L.  C.  Suppl. 

rule)  p.  73 
Sacred  books,  119 
Saints,  entry  under  forename,  31 

form  of  name,  48 
Sanskrit  names,  transliteration,  p.  70-71 


Schools,  Indian  (U.  S.),  88 

private,  87 

professional,  of  a  university,  84 

public,  86 
Scientific   names  in   zoology   and    botany, 

capitalization  (L.  C.  rule)  p.  59,  q 
Secret  societies,  74 
Selections  (excerpts),  18 
Semicolon,  173 

Semitic- languages,  transliteration,  p.  69 
Separates,  from  periodicals,  122,  note 

defined,  p.  xv.  Reprint:  2 
Serial,  defined,  p.  xvi 
Serial  number,  defined,  p.  xvi 
Serials,  titles  of,  capitalization,  172;  L.  C. 

rules,  p.  57,  a-b 
Series,  defined,  p.  xvi 
Series  entry,  128 

defined,  p.  xvi 
Scries  note,  166 

defined,  p.  xvi 
Shops,  college  or  university,  85 
sic,  u.se  of,  138 
Size,  164 

Liijrary  of  Congress  supplementary  rule, 

P-  53-54 
atlas  or  portfolio  of  plates,  p.  53  (Size) :  6 
"microscopic"    editions,     etc.,     exact 

measurement  of,  p.  53:  i 
"narrow,"     "square,"     or     "oblong" 

books,  p.  53:  2 
serials,  p.  53:  5 
volumes  of  the  same  work,  differing  in 

size,  p.  53 :  3 
works  of  different  sizes  bound  together, 

P-53:4 
Slavic  languages,  transliteration,  p.  72-73 
Sobriquets,  39 

defined,  p.  xvi 
Societies,  72-81 

affiliated,  79 

American  state,  72,  note 

benevolent  and  moral,  72,  note 

college  or  university,  76 

conventions,  conferences  and  assemblies 
of,  105 

intercollegiate,  72 

international,  73 

local,  'j2ynote 

names  of,  capitalization,  172;  L.  C.  rules, 
p.  58,  m,  59,  o 

periodicals  issued  by,  121,  ^  3 

proceedings  and  transactions  of,  121,  %  3 

secret,  74 


88 


INDEX 


Sovereigns,  entry  under  forename,  31 

members  of  the  immediate  family  of,  32 

vernacular  form  of  name,  46 
Spelling,  errors  of,  how  indicated,  138 

of  (ierman  and  Swedish  forename>,  27 
Stamp  collections,  89 
State  institutions,  American,  91 

libraries,  American,  91 

societies,  American,  72,  tiote 

trials,  133 

universities,  American,  91 
States,  official  publications  of.  58-71 
Statutes,  62 
Subtitle,  defined,  p.  xvi 
Supplements  (continuations),  14 

to  periodicals,  monograph,  121 
Surnames,  compound,  25 

entr>'  under,  24-30 

with  prefixes,  26 
Swedish  f<irenames,  spelling  of,  27 
SyntKls,  io4 
Syriac  names,  53 

Table-talk,  20 

Tables  (L.  ('.  Suppl.  rule)  p.  53,  Illustra- 
tions: 5 
Talmud,  119 
Theaters,  82-83 
Thematic  catalogs,  10 
Theses,  3 

defined,  see  Dissertation,  academic,  p.  xiv 
Title,  added  entry  under,  169 

iidditions  to,  139 

defined,  p.  xvi 

fullness  of,  136 

main  entry  under,  1 12-129 

misprints  or  errors  of  spelling  in,  138 

omissions  from    136 

quoted,  capitalization  (L.  C\  rule)  p.  57,  a 

same  work  published  under  different  titles 
143 

supplied,  when  t.-p.  is  wanting,  147 

titles   and    title-pages    in    different    lan- 
guages, 145 

titles  of  works  (other  than  periodicals)  in 
morethanoncvolume,  142.    Seealsoii^ 

transliteration  and  translation  of,  141 
Title,  alternative,  capitalization  (L.  (".  rule) 
p.  57,  a 
defined,  p.  xiii 

bastard,  defined  see  Half-title,  p.  xiv 

binder's,  defined,  p.  xiii 

caption,  defined,  p.  xiii 

rover-title,  defined,  p.  xiv 

half-title,  defined,  p.  xiv 

running  title,  defined,  p.  xvi 

subtitle,  defined,  p.  xvi 


Title  entry,  1 12-129 

capitalization,  172;  L.  C  rule,  p.  57;  b 

defined,  p.  xvi 

different  spelling  of  first  word,  116 
Title-page,  defined,  p.  xvi 

wanting,  147 
Title-pjiges,  books  with  several,  144 

in  different  languages,  145 

reprints  with  two  title-pages,  146 
Titles  of  address,  capitalization  (L.  C.  rule) 
p.  58. 1 

of  honor,  capitalization  (L.  C.  rule)  p.  58,  k 
entry  under,  32-33 
to  be  added  in  the  heading,  35 
Towns,  official  publications  of.  58-61 
Transjict ions  of  societies,  121,  II  3 
Translated  names,  43 
Translation  of  title,  141 
Translations,  21 

anonymous  works,  ii8 
Transliterated  names,  42 
Transliteration  (Appendix  2:  p.  65-73 

and  translation  of  title,  141 

tlefined,  p.  xvi 
Treaties,  71 
Trials,  132-135 
Trustees,  108 
Turkish  writers,  52 

Umlaut,  131 
Universities,  82-85,  91-95 

American  state,  91 

called  Imperial,  Royal,  etc.,  93 

colleges  or  professional  schools  of,  84 

European,  form  of  name,  93,  note 
University  institutions,  85,  94,  95  :  i.  See 
a/jo  92,  Agricultural  experiment  stations 

libraries,  85 

observatories,  85,  94 

s(Hieties,  76 
Unused  forenames.  28 

Variations  (music),  8 

Vernacular  form  of  geographic  names,  130 

of  personal  names,  23 
Visitations,  heraldic,  ii 
Volume,  defined,  p.  xvi 
Volumes,  number  of,  159;  L.  C.  Sup|»l.  rule 

p.  51:2. 
Vowels,  mo<lified,  131 

Women,  married,  40 

Works  (other  than  periodicals;  in  more  than 
one  volume,  titles  of,  142.    See  also  113 

Vear-lK)oks,  123 

Young  men's  Christian  assoi:iations,  72 

Zoological  gardens,  95 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGiONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

405  Hilgard  Avenue,  Los  Angeles,  CA  90024-1388 

Return  this  material  to  the  library 

from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


MCtLI-nL 


UCUk-College  Ubrary 

Z  695  A5 1908 


L. 


A     001  074  477     9 


